You are on page 1of 434

FOREWORD

Your INFINITI represents a new way of think-


ing about vehicle design. It integrates ad- Additionally, a separate Customer Care and
WARNING
vanced engineering and superior craftsman- Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain
how to resolve any concerns you may have IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS
ship with a simple, refined aesthetic
with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights FOR SAFETY!
sensitivity associated with traditional Japa-
nese culture. under your state’s lemon law. Follow these important driving rules to help
ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and
The result is a different notion of luxury and READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY your passengers!
beauty. The car itself is important, but so is
the sense of harmony that the vehicle evokes Before driving your vehicle, read your Own- ● NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or
in its driver, and the sense of satisfaction you er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil- drugs.
feel with the INFINITI — from the way it looks iarity with controls and maintenance require-
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and
and drives to the high level of dealer service. ments, assisting you in the safe operation of
never drive too fast for conditions.
your vehicle.
To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the ● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
fullest, we encourage you to read this Own- and avoid using vehicle features or taking
er’s Manual immediately. It explains all of the other actions that could distract you.
features, controls and performance charac-
teristics of your INFINITI; it also provides ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate
important instructions and safety informa- child restraint systems. Pre-teen children
tion. should be seated in the rear seat.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet is ● ALWAYS provide information about the
included in your Owner’s literature portfolio. proper use of vehicle safety features to all
The INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide occupants of the vehicle.
explains details about maintaining and ser- ● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for im-
vicing your vehicle. Always carry it with you portant safety information.
when you take your vehicle to an INFINITI
dealer. The Warranty Information Booklet con-
tents provide complete information about all
warranties covering this vehicle, the require-
ments to keep the warranties in effect as well
as the INFINITI Roadside Assistance program.

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE THIS MANUAL
This vehicle should not be modified. Modifica- You will see various symbols in this manual.
tion could affect its performance, safety or They are used in the following ways:
durability, and may even violate governmen-
tal regulations. In addition, damage or perfor- WARNING
mance problems resulting from modification
will not be covered under the INFINITI warran- This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-
ties. ard that could cause death or serious personal
injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the proce-
dures must be followed precisely.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
SIC0697
This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find CAUTION If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not
some information that does not apply to your This is used to indicate the presence of a haz- do this” or “Do not let this happen” .
vehicle. ard that could cause minor or moderate per-
sonal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid
All information, specifications and illustrations
or reduce the risk, the procedures must be fol-
in this manual are those in effect at the time of
lowed carefully. If you see a symbol similar to those above in an
printing. INFINITI reserves the right to change
specifications or design at any time without illustration, it means the arrow points to the
notice. front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to


those above indicate movement or action.

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to BLUETOOTH姞 is a trade-
those above call attention to an item in the mark owned by Bluetooth
illustration. SIG, Inc., U.S.A.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 © 2008 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
WARNING All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Gracenote姞 is a registered
trademark of Gracenote, Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
WARNING retrieval system, or transmitted in any form,
Inc. The Gracenote logo
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and or by any means, electronic, mechanical, pho-
and logo type, and the
certain vehicle components contain or emit tocopying, recording or otherwise, without the
chemicals known to the State of California to “Powered by Gracenote”
prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro- logo are trademarks of
Ltd.
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con- Gracenote.
tained in vehicles and certain products of com- XM Radio姞 requires
ponent wear contain or emit chemicals known
subscription, sold
to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. separately after first 90
days. Not available in
Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY For more information, visit
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, www.xmradio.com.
may contain perchlorate material. The following
advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material -
special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

췽—

09/02/08—pattie 墍
INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
INFINITI CARES ...
Both INFINITI and your INFINITI dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your INFINITI dealer
are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for You can write to INFINITI with the information on
INFINITI dealer cannot assist you with or you the following information: the left at:
would like to provide INFINITI directly with
– Your name, address, and telephone number For U.S. customers
comments or questions, please contact our
(INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs Department using – Vehicle identification number (on dash INFINITI Division
our toll-free number: panel) Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
For U.S. customers – Date of purchase P.O. Box 685003
1-800-662-6200 Franklin, TN 37068-5003
– Current odometer reading

For Canadian customers – Your INFINITI dealer’s name For Canadian customers
INFINITI Division
1-800-361-4792 – Your comments or questions Nissan Canada Inc.
OR 5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and thank you for buying a quality INFINITI vehicle.

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10
췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8


system (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
Exterior front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-11
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 VK45DE engine*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-11
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5 VQ35HR engine* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-12
Cockpit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

6. Front passenger air bag status light


(P. 1-42)
7. Rear armrest (P. 1-7)
8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-17)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags (P. 1-34)
10. Front armrest (P. 1-6)
11. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-34)
— Advanced air bag system (P. 1-40)

SSI0223
1. Child restraint anchor points (for top 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
tether strap child restraint) (Page 1-19) mental air bags (P. 1-34)
2. Head restraints (P. 1-5) 5. Seats (P. 1-2)
— Front-seat Active Head Restraints — Front seats (P. 1-2)
(P. 1-6) — Rear seats (P. 1-4)
3. Seat belts (P. 1-8) — Child restraints (P. 1-15)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
EXTERIOR FRONT

4. Moonroof (P. 2-46)


5. Power windows (P. 2-43)
6. Recovery hook (P. 6-15)
7. License plate installation (P. 9-14)
8. Fog lights (P. 2-33)
9. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P. 8-34, P. 9-9)
— Flat tire (P. 6-2)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) (P. 2-15, P. 5-3)
10. Outside mirrors (P. 3-24)
11. Doors
— Keys (P. 3-2)
— Door locks (P. 3-4)
— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)
— Security system (P. 2-24)

SSI0369
1. Hood (P. 3-17) 3. Windshield wiper and washer
2. Headlight and turn signal lights — Switch operation (P. 2-27)
— Switch operation (P. 2-29) — Rain-sensing auto wiper system
— Bulb replacement (P. 8-30) (P. 2-28)
— Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (if — Blade replacement (P. 8-23)
so equipped) (P. 2-31) — Window washer fluid (P. 8-17)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
EXTERIOR REAR

6. Rear view camera (if so equipped)


(P. 4-22)
7. Back-up lights
— Bulb replacement (P. 8-30)
8. Rear combination lights
— Bulb replacement (P. 8-30)
9. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-6)

SSI0370
1. Trunk 4. Satellite radio antenna (if so equipped)
— Trunk lid (P. 3-17) (P. 4-35)
— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6) 5. Fuel-filler door
2. High-mounted stop light — Operation (P. 3-20)
— Bulb replacement (P. 8-30) — Fuel recommendation (P. 9-4)
3. Rear window defroster (P. 2-28)
0-4 Illustrated table of contents

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

5. Door armrest
— Power window switches (P. 2-43)
— Power door lock switch (P. 3-5)
6. Automatic drive positioner switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-26)
7. Sun visors (P. 3-22)
8. Front map lights (P. 2-49)
9. Moonroof switch (P. 2-46)
10. Sunglasses holder (P. 2-41)
11. Inside rearview mirror (P. 3-23)
— HomeLink姞 universal transceiver
(P. 2-51)
— Compass (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)
12. Trunk pass-through/Rear armrest
(P. 1-7)
13. Rear seat controls (if so equipped)
— Rear power seat adjust switch (P. 1-4)
— Heated seat switches (P. 2-34)
— Automatic return ON/CANCEL switch
(P. 1-4)
SSI0371 — Rear sunshade control switch
1. Rear sunshade (if so equipped) (P. 2-47) 4. Mobile Entertainment System (MES) (P. 2-47)
2. Rear personal lights (P. 2-49) (if so equipped)
14. Rear passenger control switches
— Flip-down screen (P. 4-62)
3. Coat hooks (P. 2-43) — Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) drive (if so equipped)
(P. 4-61) — For climate control (P. 4-33)
— Headphones (P. 4-63) — For audio system (P. 4-59)
— DVD remote controller (P. 4-64) 15. Rear cup holders (P. 2-40)
Illustrated table of contents 0-5

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
16. Console box
— Power outlet (P. 2-38)
— Auxiliary input jacks (P. 4-60)
— DVD drive (if so equipped) (P. 4-61)
— iPod姞 connection (if so equipped)
(P. 4-47)
17. Front cup holders (P. 2-40)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
COCKPIT

— ENTER switch (if so equipped)


(P. 4-6, P. 4-57)
— For audio system (P. 4-57)
— For phone system (P. 4-73, P. 4-84)
— For voice recognition system
(if so equipped) (P. 4-99)
7. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-27)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls
(right side)
— Cruise control switches (P. 5-23)
— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-25)
— Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-16)
9. Hood release handle (P. 3-17)
10. Trunk lid release switch (P. 3-18)
11. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-36, P. 5-16)
12. Intelligent Key port (P. 5-9)
13. Tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch
SIC3601 (P. 3-22)
1. Instrument brightness control switch 4. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch 14. Steering wheel
(P. 2-32) (P. 2-37) — Horn (P. 2-34)
2. Outside mirror remote control switch 5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch — Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-34)
(P. 3-24) (P. 2-29) 15. Automatic Transmission (AT) selector
6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) lever (P. 5-11)
3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)
switch (P. 2-31)
Illustrated table of contents 0-7

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
INSTRUMENT PANEL

7. Center multi-function control panel


(P. 4-2)
— Navigation system* (if so equipped)
— Vehicle information and setting buttons
(P. 4-7)
— Phone system (P. 4-73, P. 4-84)
— Audio system (P. 4-34)
8. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-34)
9. Fuse box cover (P. 8-25)
10. Parking brake
— Operation (P. 5-15)
— Parking (P. 5-48)
11. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-7)
12. Clock (P. 2-38)
13. Climate controlled seat switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-35)
14. Snow mode switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-37)
15. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-47)
SIC3551
16. Rear control cancel switch (if so
1. Side ventilator (P. 4-28) 4. Security indicator light (P. 2-26) equipped) (P. 2-47) or Climate controlled
2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-5) 5. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33) seat switch (if so equipped)
3. Center ventilator (P. 4-28) 6. Automatic climate control system (P. 2-35)
(P. 4-29) 17. Climate controlled seat switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-35)
18. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays (P. 2-39)
0-8 Illustrated table of contents

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
19. CompactFlash card slot (if so equipped)
(P. 4-46)
20. Audio system (P. 4-34)
21. Glove box lid release button (P. 2-41)
22. Trunk release power cancel switch
(P. 3-19)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
METERS AND GAUGES

9. TRIP/RESET knob for twin trip odometer


(P. 2-6)

SIC3605
1. Engine coolant temperature gauge 5. Fuel gauge (P. 2-7)
(P. 2-7) 6. Meter illumination control knob (P. 2-8)
2. Tachometer (P. 2-6) 7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display
3. Warning/Indicator lights (P. 2-12) (P. 2-21)
4. Speedometer (P. 2-6) 8. Odometer/twin trip odometer (P. 2-6)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
ENGINE COMPARTMENT

8. Radiator filler cap (P. 8-10)


— Vehicle overheat (P. 6-11)
9. Engine drive belt location (P. 8-19)
10. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-12)
11. Air cleaner (P. 8-22)
* Shown with the engine compartment access
panels removed. For removal and replacement
instructions, see “ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CHECK LOCATIONS” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section.

SDI2154
VK45DE ENGINE* 4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)
1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P. 8-25) 5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)
2. Battery (P. 8-17) 6. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-10)
— Jump starting (P. 6-8) 7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-12)

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
7. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)
8. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)
9. Air cleaner (P. 8-22)
10. Engine drive belt location (P. 8-19)
11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-10)
* Shown with the engine compartment access
panels removed. For removal and replacement
instructions, see “ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CHECK LOCATIONS” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section.

SDI2307
VQ35HR ENGINE* 3. Radiator filler cap (P. 8-10)
— Vehicle overheat (P. 6-11)
1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P. 8-25)
4. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-12)
2. Battery (P. 8-17)
— Jump starting (P. 6-8) 5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-12)
6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19


Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Child restraint installation using the seat
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Front-seat Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Precautions on booster seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Precautions on supplemental restraint
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System
Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 (front seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Pre-crash seat belts (front seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Front seat-mounted side-impact
Three-point type seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 supplemental air bags and roof-mounted
Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 curtain side-impact supplemental air bag
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) . . . . . . 1-46
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
system (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Repair and replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
SEATS

● The seat back should not be reclined any


more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are
most effective when the passenger sits well
back and straight up in the seat. If the seat
back is reclined, the risk of sliding under the
lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not
to contact any moving parts to avoid possible
injuries and/or damages.

SSS0133 FRONT SEATS


WARNING ● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving Front power seat adjustment
so full attention may be given to vehicle op-
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the Operating tips::
eration. The seat may move suddenly and
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.
could cause loss of control of the vehicle. ● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
The shoulder belt will not be against your
overload protection circuit. If the motor
body. In an accident, you could be thrown ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
into it and receive neck or other serious inju- make sure it is securely locked.
then reactivate the switch.
ries. You could also slide under the lap belt
● Do not leave children unattended inside the
and receive serious internal injuries. ● Do not operate the power seat switch for a
vehicle. They could unknowingly activate
long period of time when the engine is off.
● For the most effective protection when the switches or controls. Unattended children
This will discharge the battery.
vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up- could become involved in serious accidents.
right. Always sit well back in the seat with See “AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER” in the “3.
both feet on the floor and adjust the seat Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for
properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT the seat position memory function.
USAGE” later in this section.

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
SSS0474 SSS0475
Forward and backward: The reclining feature allows adjustment of the Seat lifter:
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
Moving the switch 䊊
1 forward or backward will
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
slide the seat forward or backward to the down to adjust the angle of the front portion or
belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
desired position. height of the seat.
USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback
Reclining: can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is
Move the recline switch 䊊 2 backward until the in the P (Park) position with the parking brake
desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback fully applied.
forward again, move the switch 䊊 2 forward.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

췽—

09/02/08—pattie 墍
SSS0476 SSS0631 SSS0478
Lumbar support: REAR SEATS Entry/exit assist (automatic return):
The lumbar support feature provides lower back Rear power seat adjustment (if so Pushing the ON side 䊊 1 of the switch located on
support. the rear center armrest, the automatic return
equipped) function will activate.
Push the front 䊊1 or back 䊊
2 end of the switch
Forward and backward: When a rear door is opened, the rear seat of the
to adjust the seatback lumbar area.
Push the front 䊊1 or back 䊊
2 end of the switch corresponding side automatically slides all the
to move the rear outboard seats forward or way back, facilitating ease of entry and exit.
backward. The seats move continuously while Pushing the CANCEL side 䊊 2 of the switch will
the switch is being pushed. deactivate the automatic return function.

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as
they may provide significant protection against
injury in an accident. Do not remove them.
Check the adjustment after someone else uses
the seat.

SSS0228A SSS0287
Adjustment Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of your ears.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
To lower, push and hold the lock knob 䊊
1 and
push the head restraint down.
To adjust the head restraint angle 䊊
2 , push it in
the direction required. (front seat head re-
straints)

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-
ing the force that the seatback receives from
the occupant in a rear-end collision. The move-
ment of the head restraint helps support the
occupant’s head by reducing its backward
movement and helping absorb some of the
forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-
sions at low to medium speeds in which it is
said that whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
SSS0508 SIC2783
restraints return to their original positions.
FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD ARMREST
Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as
RESTRAINTS described earlier in this section. Front armrest
WARNING Pull the lever 䊊
A up and slide the driver’s or
passenger’s armrest forward and backward.
● Always adjust the head restraints properly
as specified in this section. Failure to do so Slide the armrest to the original position when
can reduce the effectiveness of the Active using the front cup holders.
Head Restraint.
● Active Head Restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Always
wear seat belts. No system can prevent all
injuries in any accident.
● Do not attach anything to the head restraint
stalks. Doing so could impair Active Head
Restraint function.

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
To lock the lid, use the mechanical key and turn
it to the LOCK position 䊊 2 . To unlock, turn the
mechanical key to the UNLOCK position 䊊 3 . For
the mechanical key usage, see “KEYS” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
Make sure that the mechanical key is removed
from the trunk pass-through lid key cylinder
before opening or closing the lid. Otherwise the
lid and the rear armrest may be damaged.

SSS0520 SSS0479
Rear armrest Trunk pass-through
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal. The rear center seatback can be folded to allow
trunk access from inside of the vehicle.
To access the trunk, pull down the rear center
armrest and pull out the trunk pass-through
lid 䊊
1 .

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE


If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well
back in your seat with both feet on the floor,
your chances of being injured or killed in an
accident and/or the severity of injury may be
greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages
you and all of your passengers to buckle up
every time you drive, even if your seating
position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or ter-
ritories specify that seat belts be worn at all
times when a vehicle is being driven.
SSS0136

SSS0134

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
WARNING ● Do not allow more than one person to use the
same seat belt.
● Every person who drives or rides in this ve-
hicle should use a seat belt at all times. Chil- ● Never carry more people in the vehicle than
dren should be properly restrained in the there are seat belts.
rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child
● If the seat belt warning light glows continu-
restraint.
ously while the ignition is turned ON with all
● The seat belt should be properly adjusted to doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it
a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the may indicate a malfunction in the system.
effectiveness of the entire restraint system Have the system checked by an INFINITI
and increase the chance or severity of injury dealer.
in an accident. Serious injury or death can
● No changes should be made to the seat belt
occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.
SSS0016 system. For example, do not modify the seat
● Always route the shoulder belt over your belt, add material, or install devices that
shoulder and across your chest. Never put may change the seat belt routing or tension.
the belt behind your back, under your arm or Doing so may affect the operation of the seat
across your neck. The belt should be away belt system. Modifying or tampering with
from your face and neck, but not falling off the seat belt system may result in serious
your shoulder. personal injury.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as ● Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated,
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. it cannot be reused and must be replaced
A lap belt worn too high could increase the together with the retractor. See an INFINITI
risk of internal injuries in an accident. dealer.
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fas- ● Removal and installation of the pretensioner
tened to the proper buckle. system components should be done by an
SSS0014 INFINITI dealer.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● All seat belt assemblies, including retractors There are three basic types of child restraint straints for infants and small children. (See
and attaching hardware, should be in- systems: “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)
spected after any collision by an INFINITI ● Rear-facing child restraint Also, there are other types of child restraints
dealer. INFINITI recommends that all seat available for larger children for additional pro-
belt assemblies in use during a collision be ● Front-facing child restraint
tection.
replaced unless the collision was minor and ● Booster seat
the belts show no damage and continue to INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens and chil-
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not The proper restraint depends on the child’s dren be restrained in the rear seat. According to
in use during a collision should also be in- size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and accident statistics, children are safer when
spected and replaced if either damage or less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in properly restrained in the rear seat than in the
improper operation is noted. rear-facing child restraints. Front-facing child front seat.
restraints are available for children who out- This is especially important because your ve-
● All child restraints and attaching hardware grow rear-facing child restraints and are at least
should be inspected after any collision. Al- hicle has a supplemental restraint system (air
1 year old. Booster seats are used to help bag system) for the front passenger. (See
ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in- position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child
spection instructions and replacement rec- “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” later in
who can no longer use a front-facing child this section.)
ommendations. The child restraints should restraint.
be replaced if they are damaged.
Infants
WARNING
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
CHILD SAFETY Infants and children need special protection. placed in a rear-facing child restraint. INFINITI
The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them prop- recommends that infants be placed in child
Children need adults to help protect them. They
erly. The shoulder belt may come too close to restraints that comply with Federal Motor Ve-
need to be properly restrained.
the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over
hicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-
In addition to the general information in this their small hip bones. In an accident, an im-
hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
manual, child safety information is available properly fitting seat belt could cause serious or
fatal injury. Always use appropriate child child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
from many other sources, including doctors, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for in-
teachers, government traffic safety offices, and restraints.
stallation and use.
community organizations. Every child is differ-
ent, so be sure to learn the best way to trans- All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
port your child. tories require the use of approved child re-
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Small children belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only INJURED PERSONS
be used in seating positions that have a three-
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit INFINITI recommends that injured persons use
least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a front-facing the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with
child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s in- it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety your doctor for specific recommendations.
structions for minimum and maximum weight Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
and height recommendations. INFINITI recom- PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS (front seats)
Standards. Once the child has grown so the
mends that small children be placed in child shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat belt to
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Ve- and neck, use the shoulder belt without the help restrain front seat occupants under emer-
hicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve- booster seat. gency braking. This can help reduce the risk of
hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a injury when a collision occurs.
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always WARNING
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for in- Pre-crash seat belt will not be activated when:
stallation and use. Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and ● the brake pedal is not depressed
do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the
Larger children vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously ● the seat belt is not fastened
injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop. ● the selector lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat tion
belts which are provided. The seat belt may not PREGNANT WOMEN ● the vehicle speed is under 10 MPH (15 km/h)
fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in
(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) INFINITI recommends that pregnant women use Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit
and 80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, upright and well back in the seat with both feet
used to obtain proper seat belt fit. and always position the lap belt as low as on the floor.
possible around the hips, not the waist. Place If the seat belt warning light blinks even if the
INFINITI recommends that a child be placed in a the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across
commercially available booster seat if the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts are
your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over fastened, it may indicate the pre-crash seat belt
shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for
close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of system has a malfunction. Have your INFINITI
specific recommendations. dealer check and repair the system.
the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The
booster seat should raise the child so that the
shoulder belt is properly positioned across the
top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this ve-
hicle should use a seat belt at all times.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.
The shoulder belt will not be against your
body. In an accident, you could be thrown
into it and receive neck or other serious inju-
ries. You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries. SSS0292 SSS0290
● For the most effective protection when the Fastening the seat belts 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug
vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up- on the hips as shown.
right. Always sit well back in the seat with 1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in
both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt this section.) 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
properly. 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac- retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure
tor and insert the tongue into the buckle the shoulder belt is routed over your
until you hear and feel the latch engage. shoulder and across your chest.
● The retractor is designed to lock during a The front passenger and the rear seating posi-
sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling mo- tions three-point type seat belts have two
tion permits the belt to move, and allows you modes of operation:
some freedom of movement in the seat.
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully
retracted position, firmly pull the belt and ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
the retractor. allows the seat belt to extend and retract to
allow the driver and passengers some freedom

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or check the operation as follows:
during certain impacts. ● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for strict further belt movement.
child restraint installation. If the retractor does not lock during this check
When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt or if you have any question about seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt operation, see an INFINITI dealer.
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in SSS0326
this section.
Unfastening the seat belts
The ALR mode should be used only for child
restraint installation. During normal seat belt To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on
use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
activated. If it is activated it may cause uncom- Checking seat belt operation
fortable seat belt tension. It can also change the
operation of the front passenger air bag. See Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
“Front passenger air bag and status light” later belt movement by two separate methods:
in this section. ● When the belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
WARNING
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that
seatbacks are completely secured in the
latched position. If they are not completely se-
cured, passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjustment
button and try to move the shoulder belt
anchor up and down to make sure it is se-
curely fixed in position.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. Failure
to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an accident.

SPA1836 SSS0294A
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
Center of rear seat Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats) If, because of body size or driving position, it is
Selecting correct set of seat belts not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt
The center seat belt buckle is identified by the The shoulder belt anchor height should be and fasten it, an extender is available that is
CENTER mark 䊊 A . The center seat belt tongue adjusted to the position best for you. (See compatible with the installed seat belts. The
can be fastened only into the center seat belt “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE” earlier in extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of
buckle. this section.) length and may be used for either the driver or
front passenger seating position. See an
To adjust, push the adjustment button 䊊 A , and
INFINITI dealer for assistance if an extender is
then move the shoulder belt anchor to the
required.
desired position, so that the belt passes over
the center of the shoulder. The belt should be
WARNING
away from your face and neck, but not falling off
of your shoulder. Release the adjustment but- ● Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made by
ton to lock the shoulder belt anchor into posi- the same company which made the original
tion. equipment seat belts, should be used with
the INFINITI seat belts.

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
CHILD RESTRAINTS

● Adults and children who can use the stan- PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS
dard seat belt should not use an extender.
Such unnecessary use could result in seri- WARNING
ous personal injury in the event of an ● Infants and small children should always be
accident. placed in an appropriate child restraint
● Never use seat belt extenders to install child while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a
restraints. If the child restraint is not se- child restraint can result in serious injury or
cured properly, the child could be seriously death.
injured in a collision or a sudden stop. ● Infants and small children should never be
carried on your lap. It is not possible for even
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE the strongest adult to resist the forces of a
SSS0099 severe accident. The child could be crushed
● To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild between the adult and parts of the vehicle.
soap solution or any solution recommended Also, do not put the same seat belt around
for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then, both your child and yourself.
wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to
dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts ● Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys-
to retract until they are completely dry. tem, never install a rear-facing child re-
straint in the front seat. An inflating front air
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A
the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may rear-facing child restraint must only be used
retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide in the rear seat.
with a clean, dry cloth.
● Periodically check to see that the seat belt
and the metal components , such as buckles,
tongues, retractors, flexible wires and an-
chors work properly. If loose parts, deterio-
ration, cuts or other damage on the webbing
is found, the entire seat belt assembly
should be replaced. SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
● INFINITI recommends that the child restraint ● Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned
be installed in the rear seat. According to to fit the child restraint, but as upright as restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the
accident statistics, children are safer when possible. Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System
properly restrained in the rear seat than in or LATCH. Some child restraints include two
● After attaching the child restraint, test it be- rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
the front seat. If you must install a front-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from be connected to these lower anchors. For de-
facing child restraint in the front seat, see
side to side while holding the seat near the tails, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
“CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH attachment or by the seat belt path. dren SYSTEM (LATCH)” later in this section.
THE SEAT BELTS” later in this section.
The child restraint should not move more
● Improper use or improper installation of a than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to side. Try to If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
child restraint can increase the risk or sever- tug it forward and check to see if the belt restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
ity of injury for both the child and other oc- holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is (See “CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
cupants of the vehicle and can lead to seri- not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or THE SEAT BELTS” later in this section.) In gen-
ous injury or death in an accident. put the restraint in another seat and test it eral, child restraints are also designed to be
again. You may need to try a different child installed with a lap/shoulder seat belt.
● Follow all of the child restraint manufactur-
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
er’s instructions for installation and use.
types of vehicles. infants and small children of various sizes.
When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to
select one which will fit your child and ve- ● When your child restraint is not in use, keep When selecting any child restraint, keep the
hicle. It may not be possible to properly in- it secured with the LATCH system or a seat following points in mind:
stall some types of child restraints in your belt to prevent it from being thrown around ● Choose only a restraint with a label certify-
vehicle. in case of a sudden stop or accident. ing that it complies with Federal Motor Ve-
● If the child restraint is not anchored prop- hicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
erly, the risk of a child being injured in a Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
CAUTION
collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. ● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
● Child restraint anchor points are designed to Remember that a child restraint left in a closed be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
withstand only those loads imposed by cor- vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating seat and seat belt system.
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir- surface and buckles before placing your child in ● If the child restraint is compatible with your
cumstances are they to be used for adult the child restraint. vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
seat belts or harnesses. and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
your child. Choose a child restraint that is The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
designed for your child’s height and weight. child restraints in the rear outboard seating
Always follow all recommended procedures. positions only. Do not attempt to install a child
restraint in the center position using the LATCH
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-
anchors.
ries require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint at all
times while the vehicle is being operated. Cana-
dian law requires the top tether strap on front-
facing child restraints be secured to the desig-
nated anchor point on the vehicle.

SSS0567
LATCH system anchor location

LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS FOR


CHILDREN SYSTEM (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compatible
child restraints. This system may also be re-
ferred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible
system. With this system, you do not have to
use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child
restraint.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
LATCH lower anchor point locations
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the
seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH anchors.

WARNING
● Attach LATCH system compatible child re-
straints only at the locations shown in the
illustration. If a child restraint is not secured
properly, your child could be seriously in-
SSS0659 jured or killed in an accident. SSS0643
LATCH lower anchor location (Type A) ● Do not secure a child restraint in the center LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
rear seating position using the LATCH an-
chors. The child restraint will not be secured Installing child restraint LATCH
properly. anchor attachments
● Child restraint anchor points are designed to LATCH compatible child restraints include two
withstand only those loads imposed by cor- rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir- be connected to two anchors located at certain
cumstances are they to be used for adult seating positions in your vehicle. With this
seat belts or harnesses. system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint. Check your
child restraint for a label stating that it is
compatible with the LATCH system. This infor-
mation may also be in the instructions provided
by the child restraint manufacturer.
SSS0637
LATCH lower anchor location (Type B)

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint re-
quires the use of a top tether strap, it must be
secured to an anchor point.

WARNING
Child restraint anchor points are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult seat belts
or harnesses.
SSS0644 SSS0568
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the rear parcel
LATCH child restraints generally require the use
shelf.
of a top tether strap. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP
CHILD RESTRAINT” later in this section for in- Installing top tether strap
stallation instructions.)
First secure the child restraint with the LATCH
When installing a child restraint, carefully read system (rear outboard seating positions only) or
and follow the instructions in this manual and
the seat belt as applicable.
those supplied with the child restraint. (See
“CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH” 1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor
later in this section.) point which is located directly behind the
child seat.
2. Position the top tether strap over the top
of the seatback.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
3. Secure the tether strap to tether anchor ● Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your
bracket that provides the straightest in- fingers into the lower anchor area and feel-
stallation. ing to make sure there are no obstructions
4. Tighten the strap according to the manu- over the LATCH anchors, such as seat belt
facturer’s instructions to remove any webbing or seat cushion material. The child
slack. restraint will not be secured properly if the
LATCH anchors are obstructed.
If you have any questions when installing a top
tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, con-
sult your INFINITI dealer for details. Front-facing
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint using LATCH system:
USING LATCH SSS0645
1. If your vehicle is equipped with rear power
seat adjustment, adjust the rear outboard Front-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 3
WARNING
seats to the upright and rearmost posi-
● Attach LATCH system compatible child re- tion. (See “REAR SEATS” earlier in this 3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
straints only at the locations shown. For the section.) ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
LATCH lower anchor locations, see “Lower to make sure the LATCH attachment is
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYSTEM properly attached to the lower anchors.
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
(LATCH)” earlier in this section. If a child
turer’s instructions.
restraint is not secured properly, your child
could be seriously injured or killed in an
accident.
● The LATCH anchors are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly
fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stance are they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses.

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
4. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback. If
necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child re-
straint fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” ear-
lier in this section.)
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head
restraint when the child restraint is re-
moved.
If the seating position does not have an
SSS0646
adjustable head restraint and it is interfer- SSS0647
ing with the proper child restraint fit, try
Front-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 3 another seating position or a different child Front-facing — step 5
restraint.
5. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove
any additional slack from the anchor at-
tachments. Press downward and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint
with your knee to compress the vehicle
seat cushion and seatback while tighten-
ing the webbing of the anchor attach-
ments.
6. If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether strap
and secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP
CHILD RESTRAINT” earlier in this section.)

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
8. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4
through 7.
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using LATCH system:
1. If your vehicle is equipped with rear power
seat adjustment, adjust the rear outboard
seats to the upright and rearmost posi-
tion. (See “REAR SEATS” earlier in this
SSS0638 section.) SSS0648
Front-facing — step 7 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Rear-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 3
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it turer’s instructions. 3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
before you place the child in it. Push it ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
from side to side while holding the seat to make sure the LATCH attachment is
near the LATCH attachment path. The properly attached to the lower anchors.
child restraint should not move more than
1 inch (25 mm) from side to side. Try to tug
it forward and check to see if the LATCH
attachment holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
LATCH attachment as necessary, or put
the restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
SSS0649 SSS0639 SSS0650
Rear-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5

4. For child restraints that are equipped with 5. After attaching the child restraint, test it
webbing-mounted attachments, remove before you place the child in it. Push it
any additional slack from the anchor at- from side to side while holding the seat
tachments. Press downward and rearward near the LATCH attachment path. The
firmly in the center of the child restraint child restraint should not move more than
with your hand to compress the vehicle 1 inch (25 mm) from side to side. Try to tug
seat cushion and seatback while tighten- it forward and check to see if the LATCH
ing the webbing of the anchor attach- attachment holds the restraint in place. If
ments.
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
LATCH attachment as necessary, or put
the restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in
all types of vehicles.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
6. Check to make sure the child restraint is ● INFINITI recommends that child restraints be
properly secured prior to each use. If the installed in the rear seat. However, if you
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4 must install a front-facing child restraint in
through 5. the front passenger seat, move the passen-
ger seat to the rearmost position. Also, be
sure the front passenger air bag status light
is illuminated to indicate the passenger air
bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section for details.
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) mode which must be used when
SSS0100
installing a child restraint.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION ● Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the
USING THE SEAT BELTS child restraint not being properly secured.
The restraint could tip over or otherwise be
WARNING unsecured and cause injury to the child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change
● Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys-
the operation of the front passenger air bag.
tem, never install a rear-facing child re-
See “Front passenger air bag and status
straint in the front passenger seat. Front air
light” later in this section.
bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing
child restraint could be struck by the front air ● A child restraint with a top tether strap
bag in a crash and could seriously injure or should not be used in the front passenger
kill your child. seat.

The instructions in this section apply to child


restraint installation using the vehicle seat
belts in the rear seat or the front passenger
seat.
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
1. If your vehicle is equipped with rear power
seat adjustment, adjust the rear outboard
seats to the upright and rearmost posi-
tion. (See “REAR SEATS” earlier in this
section.)
If you must install a child restraint in the front
seat, it should be placed in a front-facing
direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost
position. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and there-
fore must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
SSS0640 Always follow the child restraint manufac- SSS0360B
Front-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1 turer’s instructions. Front-facing — step 3
The back of the child restraint should be
Front-facing secured against the seatback. If necessary, 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
adjust or remove the head restraint to ob- child restraint and insert it into the buckle
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
tain the correct child restraint fit. (See until you hear and feel the latch engage.
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
seat or in the front passenger seat: “HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section.)
facturer’s instructions for belt routing.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head
restraint when the child restraint is re-
moved.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfer-
ing with the proper child restraint fit, try
another seating position or a different child
restraint.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SSS0651 SSS0652 SSS0653
Front-facing — step 4 Front-facing — step 5 Front-facing — step 6

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the
extended. At this time, the seat belt re- the shoulder belt to remove any slack in seat belt; press downward and rearward
tractor is in the Automatic Locking Retrac- the belt. firmly in the center of the child restraint
tor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It with your knee to compress the vehicle
reverts to the Emergency Locking Retrac- seat cushion and seatback while pulling
tor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully up on the seat belt.
retracted.
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether strap
and secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point (rear seat installation only).
(See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-
STRAINT” earlier in this section.) Do not
install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap to seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.
1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR
mode by trying to pull more seat belt out
of the retractor. If you cannot pull any
more belt webbing out of the retractor,
the retractor is in the ALR mode.
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 9.

SSS0641 SSS0481
Front-facing — step 8 Front-facing — step 11

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it 11. If the child restraint is installed in the
before you place the child in it. Push it front passenger seat, push the ignition
from side to side while holding the seat switch to the ON position. The front pas-
near the seat belt path. The child restraint senger air bag status light should
should not move more than 1 inch (25 illuminate. If this light is not illuminated,
mm) from side to side. Try to tug it see “Front passenger air bag and status
forward and check to see if the belt holds light” later in this section. Move the child
the restraint in place. If the restraint is restraint to another seating position .
not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, Have the system checked by an INFINITI
or put the restraint in another seat and dealer.
test it again. You may need to try a After the child restraint is removed and the seat
different child restraint. Not all child re- belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child
straints fit in all types of vehicles. restraint mode) is canceled.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
SSS0100 SSS0654 SSS0655
Rear-facing Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear child restraint and insert it into the buckle extended. At this time, the seat belt re-
seat: until you hear and feel the latch engage. tractor is in the Automatic Locking Retrac-
1. Child restraints for infants must be used in Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- tor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It
the rear-facing direction and therefore facturer’s instructions for belt routing. reverts to the Emergency Locking Retrac-
must not be used in the front seat. tor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully
If your vehicle is equipped with rear power retracted.
seat adjustment, adjust the rear outboard
seats to the upright and rearmost position.
(See “REAR SEATS” earlier in this section.)
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SSS0656 SSS0657 SSS0658
Rear-facing — step 5 Rear-facing — step 6 Rear-facing — step 7

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the 7. After attaching the child restraint, test it
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in child restraint; press downward and rear- before you place the child in it. Push it
the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the seat
restraint with your hand to compress the near the seat belt path. The child restraint
vehicle seat cushion and seatback while should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)
pulling up on the seat belt. from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the restraint
in place. If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
BOOSTER SEATS

8. Check that the retractor is in the ALR ● INFINITI recommends that the booster seat
mode by trying to pull more seat belt out be installed in the rear seat. According to
of the retractor. If you cannot pull any accident statistics, children are safer when
more seat belt webbing out of the retrac- properly restrained in the rear seat than in
tor, the retractor is in the ALR mode. the front seat. If you must install a booster
9. Check to make sure that the child re- seat in the front seat, see “BOOSTER SEAT
straint is properly secured prior to each INSTALLATION” later in this section.
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 8. ● A booster seat must only be installed in a
seating position that has a lap/shoulder
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re- belt with a booster seat can result in a seri-
straint mode) is canceled. ous injury in sudden stop or collision.
SSS0099
● Improper use or improper installation of a
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS booster seat can increase the risk or severity
of injury for both the child and other occu-
WARNING pants of the vehicle and can lead to serious
● Infants and small children should always be injury or death in an accident.
placed in an appropriate child restraint ● Do not use towels, books, pillows or other
while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a items in place of a booster seat. Items such
child restraint or booster seat can result in as these may move during normal driving or
serious injury or death. a collision and result in serious injury or
● Infants and small children should never be death. Booster seats are designed to be
carried on your lap. It is not possible for even used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats
the strongest adult to resist the forces of a are designed to properly route the lap and
severe accident. The child could be crushed shoulder portions of the seat belt over the
between the adult and parts of the vehicle. strongest portions of a child’s body to pro-
Also, do not put the same seat belt around vide the maximum protection during a
both your child and yourself. collision.

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Follow all of the booster seat manufacturer’s CAUTION
instructions for installation and use. When
Remember that a booster seat left in a closed
purchasing a booster seat, be sure to select
vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating
one which will fit your child and vehicle. It
surface and buckles before placing your child in
may not be possible to properly install some
the booster seat.
types of booster seats in your vehicle.
● If the booster seat and seat belt is not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured in a
collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.
● Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned
to fit the booster seat, but as up- right as
possible. LRS0455
● After placing the child in the booster seat Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
and fastening the seat belt, make sure the several manufacturers. When selecting any
shoulder portion of the belt is away from the booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
child’s face and neck and the lap portion of ● Choose only a booster seat with a label
the belt does not cross the abdomen. certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
● Do not put the shoulder belt behind the child Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
or under the child’s arm. If you must install a Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
booster seat in the front seat, see “BOOSTER ● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
SEAT INSTALLATION” later in this section. sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
● When your booster seat is not in use, keep it and seat belt system.
secured with a seat belt to prevent it from
being thrown around in case of a sudden
stop or accident.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
WARNING
INFINITI recommends that booster seats be in-
stalled in the rear seat. However, if you must
install a booster seat in the front passenger
seat, move the passenger’s seat to the rear-
most position.

CAUTION
LRS0453 LRS0464 Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a
● Make sure the child’s head will be properly ● If the booster seat is compatible with your
booster seat with the seat belts.
supported by the booster seat or vehicle vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
seat. The seatback must be at or above the and check the various adjustments to be
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a sure the booster seat is compatible with Follow these steps to install a booster seat in
low back booster seat 䊊 1 is chosen, the your child. Always follow all recommended the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
vehicle seatback must be at or above the procedures.
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
ries require that infants and small children be
high back booster seat 䊊 2 should be used.
restrained in an approved child restraint at all
times while the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SSS0640 LRS0451 LRS0452
Front passenger seat Rear center position Rear outboard position

1. If your vehicle is equipped with rear power 3. The booster seat should be positioned on 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
seat adjustment, adjust the rear outboard the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure
seats to the upright and rearmost posi- necessary, adjust or remove the head to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
tion. (See “REAR SEATS” earlier in this restraint to obtain the correct booster instructions for adjusting the seat belt
section.) seat fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier routing.
in this section.) 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat
If you must install a booster seat in the front
seat, move the seat to the rearmost position. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a belt toward the retractor to take up extra
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is posi-
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
restraint when the booster seat is removed. tioned across the top, middle portion of
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the
Always follow the booster seat manufac- If the seating position does not have an booster seat manufacturer’s instructions
turer’s instructions. adjustable head restraint and it is interfer- for adjusting the seat belt routing.
ing with the proper booster seat fit, try
another seating position or a different
booster seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

췽—

08/13/08—tbrooks 墍
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning
the following systems:
● Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (INFINITI Advanced Air Bag
System)
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-
tal air bag
LRS0454 SSS0481 ● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
Front passenger seat 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front mental air bag
passenger seat, push the ignition switch ● Seat belt pretensioner
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- to the ON position. The front passenger
Supplemental front-impact air bag system: The
structions for properly fastening a seat air bag status light may or may not INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can help
belt shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE be illuminated depending on the size of cushion the impact force to the head and chest
SEAT BELT” earlier in this section. the child and the type of booster seat of the driver and front passenger in certain
used. (See “Front passenger air bag and frontal collisions.
status light” later in this section.)
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag system: This system can help cushion
the impact force to the chest and pelvis area of
the driver and front passenger in certain side
impact collisions. The side air bags are de-
signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemen-
tal air bag system: This system can help cushion
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

09/02/08—pattie 墍
the impact force to the head of occupants in
front and rear outboard seating positions in
certain side impact collisions. The curtain air
bags are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the driver and passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door fin-
ishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this section
for instructions and precautions on seat belt
usage.) SSS0131

The supplemental air bags operate only when


the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion, the supplemental air bag warning light illu-
minates. The supplemental air bag warning light
will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems
are operational.

SSS0132

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
WARNING ● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that de-
● The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in
tect if the seat belts are fastened. The Ad-
the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll-
vanced Air Bag System monitors the severity
over, or lower severity frontal collision. Al-
of a collision and seat belt usage then in-
ways wear your seat belts to help reduce the
flates the air bags. Failure to properly wear
risk or severity of injury in various kinds of
seat belts can increase the risk or severity of
accidents.
injury in an accident.
● The front passenger air bag will not inflate if
● The front passenger seat is equipped with an
the passenger air bag status light is lit or if
occupant classification sensor (pressure
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor
later in this section. SSS0007
is only used in this seat. Failure to be prop-
● The seat belts and the front air bags are most erly seated and wearing the seat belt can
effective when you are sitting well back and increase the risk or severity of injury in an
upright in the seat with both feet on the accident. See “Front passenger air bag and
floor. The front air bags inflate with great status light” later in this section.
force. Even with the INFINITI advanced air
● Keep hands on the outside of the steering
bag system, if you are unrestrained, leaning
wheel. Placing them inside the steering
forward, sitting sideways or out of position
wheel rim could increase the risk that they
in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or
are injured when the supplemental front air
death in a crash. You may also receive seri-
bag inflates.
ous or fatal injuries from the front air bag if
you are up against it when it inflates. Always
sit back against the seatback and as far-
away as practical from the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.

SSS0006

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or ex-
tend their hands or face out of the window.
Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or
arms. Some examples of dangerous riding
positions are shown in the illustrations.
● Children may be severely injured or killed
when the front air bags, side air bags or
curtain air bags inflate if they are not prop-
erly restrained. Pre-teens and children
should be properly restrained in the rear
SSS0008 SSS0099 seat, if possible.
● Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, never install a rear-facing child re-
straint in the front seat. An inflating front air
bag could seriously injure or kill your child.
See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this sec-
tion for details.

SSS0009 SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SSS0059A SSS0140 SSS0159
Do not lean against doors or windows. WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bags:
● The side air bags and curtain air bags ordi-
narily will not inflate in the event of a frontal
impact, rear impact, rollover or lower sever-
ity side collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity of
injury in various kinds of accidents.

SSS0188A SSS0162

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain
air bags are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the seat with
both feet on the floor. The side air bag and
curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do
not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or
face near the side air bag on the side of the
seatback of the front seat or near the side
roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to extend
their hand out of the window or lean against
the door. Some examples of dangerous
riding positions are shown in the previous
illustrations.
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold
onto the seatback of the front seat. If the
side air bag inflates, you may be seriously
injured. Be especially careful with children,
who should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front seat-
backs. They may interfere with side air bag
inflation.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bags inflators
8. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
9. Satellite sensors
10. Seat belt pretensioners
INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S.
regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.
However, all of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel above the
SSS0480 glove box. The front air bags are designed to
inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, al-
1. Crash zone sensor 4. Occupant classification system control
though they may inflate if the forces in another
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod- unit
type of collision are similar to those of a higher
ules 5. Occupant classification sensor (pressure severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- sensor) certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or
mental air bag modules 6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact lack of it) is not always an indication of proper
supplemental air bags front air bag operation.
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System has dual INFINITI. Contact information is contained in the The front air bags operate only when the ignition
stage inflators. The system monitors informa- front of this Owner’s Manual. switch is in the ON position.
tion from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag After pushing the ignition switch to the ON posi-
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle switches, tion, the supplemental air bag warning light illu-
may be heard, followed by release of smoke.
occupant classification sensor (pressure sen- minates. The supplemental air bag warning light
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate
sor) and passenger seat belt tension sensor. will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is
a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as
Inflator operation is based on the severity of a operational.
it may cause irritation and choking. Those with
collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For
a history of a breathing condition should get
the front passenger, it additionally monitors the
fresh air promptly.
weight of an occupant or object on the seat and
seat belt tension. Based on information from Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate help to cushion the impact force on the head
in a crash, depending on the crash severity and and chest of the front occupants. They can help
whether the front occupants are belted or un- save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
belted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag an inflating front air bag may cause facial
may be automatically turned OFF under some abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do
conditions, depending on the weight detected not provide restraint to the lower body.
on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is
Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat belts
used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the
should be correctly worn and the driver and
passenger air bag status light will be illumi-
nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will passenger seated upright as far as practical
not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). away from the steering wheel or instrument
(See “Front passenger air bag and status light” panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order
later in this section for further details.) One to help protect the front occupants. Because of
front air bag inflating does not indicate im- this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
proper performance of the system. increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, the front air bag module
If you have any questions about your air bag during inflation.
system, contact INFINITI or an INFINITI dealer. If
you are considering modification of your vehicle The front air bags deflate quickly after a colli-
due to a disability, you may also contact sion.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Status light such as children, by requiring the air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are
The front passenger air bag status light used to meet the requirements.
is located on the overhead console. The light
operates as follows: One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of
● Unoccupied passenger seat: The light the front passenger seat cushion and is de-
is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF signed to detect an occupant and objects on the
and will not inflate in a crash. seat by weight. It works together with seat belt
● Passenger seat occupied by a small adult, sensors described later. For example, if a child
child or child restraint as outlined in this is in the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air
section: The light illuminates to indi- Bag System is designed to turn the passenger
SSS0481 cate that the front passenger air bag is OFF air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations.
and will not inflate in a crash. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in
Front passenger air bag status light the regulations is on the seat, its weight and
● Occupied passenger seat and the passenger
meets the conditions outlined in this sec- the child’s weight can be detected and cause
Front passenger air bag and status the air bag to turn OFF. The occupant classifi-
light tion: The light is OFF to indicate that
cation sensor operation can vary depending on
the front passenger air bag is operational.
the front passenger seat belt sensors.
WARNING Front passenger air bag
The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-
The front passenger air bag is designed to au- The front passenger air bag is designed to signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and
tomatically turn OFF under some conditions. automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is the amount of tension on the seat belt, such as
Read this section carefully to learn how it oper- operated under some conditions as described when it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor
ates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). Based on the
restraints is necessary for most effective pro- front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate weight on the seat detected by the occupant
tection. Failure to follow all instructions in this in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags
manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts classification sensor and the belt tension de-
in your vehicle are not part of this system. tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag
and child restraints can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce System determines whether the front passen-
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air ger air bag should be automatically turned OFF
bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, as required by the regulations.
1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this illuminated (indicating that the air bag might
properly seated and using the seat belt as section for proper use and installation.) inflate in a crash), it could be that the child
outlined in this manual should not cause the restraint or seat belt is not being used properly.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag to be automatically turned Make sure that the child restraint is installed
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, properly, the seat belt is used properly and the
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
however, if the occupant takes his/her weight occupant is positioned properly. If the passen-
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting ger air bag status light is not illuminated,
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by reposition the occupant or child restraint in a
classification sensor. Other conditions could
otherwise being out of position), this could rear seat.
also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. In is standing on the seat, or if two children are on If the passenger air bag status light will not
addition, if the occupant improperly uses the the seat, contrary to the instructions in this illuminate even though you believe that the
seat belt in the ALR mode, this could cause the manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant
air bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be occupants are seated and restrained properly. are properly positioned, the system may be
seated and wearing the seat belt properly for
Using the passenger air bag status light, you sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the
the most effective protection by the seat belt
can monitor when the front passenger air bag is air bag is OFF). Your INFINITI dealer can check
and supplemental air bag.
automatically turned OFF with the seat occu- that the system is OFF by using a special tool.
INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and chil- pied. The light will not illuminate when the front However, until you have confirmed with your
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat. passenger seat is unoccupied. dealer that your air bag is working properly,
INFINITI also recommends that appropriate reposition the occupant or child restraint in a
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
child restraints and booster seats be properly rear seat.
passenger air bag status light is illuminated
installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible,
(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be The INFINITI advanced air bag system and pas-
the occupant classification sensor and seat belt
that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting senger air bag status light will take a few
sensors are designed to operate as described
on the seat properly or not using the seat belt seconds to register a change in the passenger
above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF
properly. seat status. For example, if a large adult who is
for specified child restraints as required by the
regulations. Failing to properly secure child If a child restraint must be used in the front sitting in the front passenger seat exits the
restrains and to use the ALR mode may allow seat, the passenger air bag status light may or vehicle, the passenger air bag status light will
the restraint to tip or move in an accident or may not be illuminated, depending on the size change from OFF to ON for a few seconds and
sudden stop. This can also result in the passen- of the child and the type of child restraint being then to OFF. This is normal system operation
ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being used. If the passenger air bag status light is not and does not indicate a malfunction.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger ● Do not make unauthorized changes to your ● No unauthorized changes should be made to
air bag system, the supplemental air bag warn- vehicle’s electrical system, suspension sys- any components or wiring of the seat belt
ing light , located in the meter and tem or front end structure. This could affect system. This may affect the front air bag
gauges area, will blink. Have the system proper operation of the front air bag system. system. Tampering with the seat belt system
checked by an INFINITI dealer. may result in serious personal injury.
● Tampering with the air bag system may re-
Other supplemental front-impact air sult in serious personal injury. Tampering ● Maintenance on and around the front air bag
includes changes to the steering wheel and system should be done by an INFINITI dealer.
bag precautions the instrument panel assembly by placing Installation of electrical equipment should
material over the steering wheel pad and also be done by an INFINITI dealer. The
WARNING above the instrument panel or by installing Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring
● Do not place any objects on the steering additional trim material around the air bag should not be modified or disconnected. Un-
wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, system. authorized electrical test equipment and
do not place any objects between any occu- probing devices should not be used on the
● Modifying or tampering with the front pas-
pant and the steering wheel or instrument air bag system.
senger seat may result in serious personal
panel. Such objects may become dangerous injury. For example, do not change the front ● A cracked windshield should be replaced im-
projectiles and cause injury if the front air seats by placing material on the seat cush- mediately by a qualified repair facility. A
bag inflates. ion or by installing additional trim material, cracked windshield could affect the function
● Immediately after inflation, several front air such as seat covers, on the seat that is not of the supplemental air bag system.
bag system components will be hot. Do not specifically designed to assure proper air
● The SRS wiring harness connectors are yel-
touch them; you may severely burn yourself. bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any
low and orange for easy identification.
objects under the front passenger seat or the
● No unauthorized changes should be made to seat cushion and seatback. Such objects
any components or wiring of the supplemen- may interfere with the proper operation of When selling your vehicle, we request that you
tal air bag system. This is to prevent acciden- the occupant classification sensor (pressure inform the buyer about the front air bag system
tal inflation of the supplemental air bag or sensor). and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
damage to the supplemental air bag system. in this Owner’s Manual.

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
collision are similar to those of a higher severity practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
side impact. They are designed to inflate on the passengers should be seated as far away as
side where the vehicle is impacted. They may practical from the door finishers and side roof
not inflate in certain side collisions on the side rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags
where the vehicle is impacted. inflate quickly in order to help protect the
occupants. Because of this, the force of the side
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
air bag and curtain air bag inflating can in-
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
crease the risk of injury if the occupant is too
bag operation.
close to, or is against, these air bag modules
When the side air bags and curtain air bags during inflation. The side air bag and curtain air
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, fol- bag will deflate quickly after the collision is
lowed by release of smoke. This smoke is not over.
SSS0521 harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care
should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause The side air bags and curtain air bags operate
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT irritation and choking. Those with a history of a only when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGS AND breathing condition should get fresh air tion.
ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE- promptly. After pushing the ignition switch to the ON posi-
IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, tion, the supplemental air bag warning light illu-
SYSTEMS help to cushion the impact force on the chest minates. The supplemental air bag warning light
and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of
air bags help to cushion the impact force to the are operational.
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air
head of occupants in the front and rear out-
bags are located in the side roof rails. These
board seating positions. They can help save WARNING
systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-
inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may ● Do not place any objects near the seatback
position occupants. However, all of the informa- of the front seats. Also, do not place any
cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags
tion, cautions and warnings in this manual still objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to
apply and must be followed. The side air bags front door finisher and the front seat. Such
the lower body.
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in objects may become dangerous projectiles
higher severity side collisions, although they The seat belts should be correctly worn and the and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
may inflate if the forces in another type of driver and passenger seated upright as far as
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Right after inflation, several side air bag and ● Work around and on the side air bag and SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS
curtain air bag system components will be curtain air bag system should be done by an (front seats)
hot. Do not touch them; you may severely INFINITI dealer. Installation of electrical
burn yourself. equipment should also be done by an WARNING
INFINITI dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*
● No unauthorized changes should be made to ● The pretensioners cannot be reused after ac-
should not be modified or disconnected. Un-
any components or wiring of the side air bag tivation. They must be replaced together
authorized electrical test equipment and
and curtain air bag systems. This is to pre- with the retractor and buckle as a unit.
probing devices should not be used on the
vent damage to or accidental inflation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to
side air bag or curtain air bag system. ● If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal
* The SRS wiring harnesses connectors are collision but a pretensioner is not activated,
the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
yellow and orange for easy identification. be sure to have the pretensioner system
● Do not make unauthorized changes to your checked and, if necessary, replaced by an
vehicle’s electrical system, suspension sys- INFINITI dealer.
tem or side panel. This could affect proper When selling your vehicle, we request that you
operation of the side air bag and curtain air inform the buyer about the side air bag and ● No unauthorized changes should be made to
bag systems. curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to any components or wiring of the preten-
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s sioner system. This is to prevent damage to
● Tampering with the air bag system may re- Manual. or accidental activation of the pretension-
sult in serious personal injury. For example, ers. Tampering with the pretensioner sys-
do not change the front seats by placing tem may result in serious personal injury.
material near the seatbacks or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat cov- ● Work around and on the pretensioner sys-
ers, around the side air bag. tem should be done by an INFINITI dealer.
Installation of electrical equipment should
also be done by an INFINITI dealer. Unautho-
rized electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the preten-
sioner system.

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or
system, the supplemental air bag warning light
scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI dealer.
Correct pretensioner disposal procedures will not come on, will flash intermittently
are set forth in the appropriate INFINITI Ser- or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after
vice Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON
could cause personal injury. position. In this case, the pretensioner may not
function properly. They must be checked and
repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
The pretensioner system activates in conjunc- INFINITI dealer.
tion with the front air bag system. Working with
the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat When selling your vehicle, we request that you
belt when the vehicle becomes involved in inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
certain types of collisions, helping to restrain and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual. SSS0330
front seat occupants.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same LABELS
way as conventional seat belts. Warning labels about the supplemental front-
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re- impact air bag and front seat-mounted side-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. The impact supplemental air bag systems are
smoke is not harmful, and it does not indicate a placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustra-
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it as it tion.
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get

1 SRS air bag
fresh air promptly. The warning labels are located on the surface of
the sun visors.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters al-
low the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-
sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

2 SRS side-impact air bag
The warning label is located on the side of the
passenger’s side center pillar.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
This means the system is operational. PROCEDURE
If any of the following conditions occur, the
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing: bags and pretensioners are designed to acti-
vate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,
● The supplemental air bag warning light re- unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag
mains on after approximately 7 seconds. warning light will remain illuminated after infla-
● The supplemental air bag warning light tion has occurred. Repair and replacement of
flashes intermittently. these systems should be done only by an
● The supplemental air bag warning light does INFINITI dealer.
not come on at all. When maintenance work is required on the
SPA1097
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems air bags, pretensioners and related parts
LIGHT may not operate properly. They must be should be pointed out to the person conducting
checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the the maintenance. The ignition switch should
The supplemental air bag warning light, dis-
nearest INFINITI dealer. always be in the LOCK position when working
playing in the instrument panel, moni- under the hood or inside the vehicle.
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-
WARNING
impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact
WARNING
supplemental air bag, roof-mounted curtain If the supplemental air bag warning light is on,
side-impact supplemental air bag and seat belt it could mean that the front air bag, side air ● Once a front air bag, side air bag or curtain
pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner sys- air bag has inflated, the air bag module will
include the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), satellite tems will not operate in an accident. To help not function again and must be replaced.
sensors, occupant classification system, crash avoid injury to yourself or others, have your Additionally, if any of the front air bags in-
zone sensor, front air bag modules, side air bag vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as flate, the activated pretensioner system
modules, curtain air bag modules, pretension- possible. must also be replaced. The air bag module
ers and all related wiring. and pretensioners should be replaced by an
INFINITI dealer. The air bag modules and pre-
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, tensioner system cannot be repaired.
the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-
1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● The front air bag, side air bag and curtain air
bag systems and pretensioner system
should be inspected by an INFINITI dealer if
there is any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle.
● If you need to dispose of the supplemental
air bag, pretensioner systems or scrap the
vehicle, contact an INFINITI dealer. Correct
supplemental air bag and pretensioner sys-
tem disposal procedures are set forth in the
appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incor-
rect disposal procedures could cause per-
sonal injury.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29


Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Fuel gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Meter/ring illumination and needle sweep. . . . . . . . 2-8 Heated seats (rear seats) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Climate controlled seats (front seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Zone variation change procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders. . . . . 2-12 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 SNOW mode switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Adjusting the time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Dot matrix liquid crystal display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Indicators for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Cigarette lighter and ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Windshield wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Rain-sensing auto wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Sunglasses holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . 2-28 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Vanity mirror lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Trunk light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Cargo net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 HomeLink姞 universal transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Programming HomeLink姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Programming HomeLink姞 for Canadian
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Operating the HomeLink姞 universal
Rear control cancel switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-47 transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Rear sunshade (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Programming trouble-diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button . . . . . 2-54
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Interior light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
COCKPIT

— ENTER switch (if so equipped)


(P. 4-6, P. 4-57)
— For audio system (P. 4-57)
— For phone system (P. 4-73, P. 4-84)
— For voice recognition system (if so
equipped) (P. 4-99)
7. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-27)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right
side)
— Cruise control switches (P. 5-23)
— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-25)
— Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-16)
9. Hood release handle (P. 3-17)
10. Trunk lid release switch (P. 3-18)
11. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-36, P. 5-16)
12. Intelligent Key port (P. 5-9)
13. Tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch
SIC3601 (P. 3-22)
1. Instrument brightness control switch 4. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch 14. Steering wheel
(P. 2-32) (P. 2-37) — Horn (P. 2-34)
2. Outside mirror remote control switch 5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch — Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-34)
(P. 3-24) (P. 2-29) 15. Automatic Transmission (AT) selector le-
6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left ver (P. 5-11)
3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)
switch (P. 2-31) side)

2-2 Instruments and controls

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
INSTRUMENT PANEL

7. Center multi-function control panel


— Navigation system* (if so equipped)
— Vehicle information and setting buttons
(P. 4-7)
— Phone system (P. 4-73, P. 4-84)
— Audio system (P. 4-34)
8. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-34)
9. Fuse box cover (P. 8-25)
10. Parking brake
— Operation (P. 5-15)
— Parking (P. 5-48)
11. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-7)
12. Clock (P. 2-38)
13. Climate controlled seat switch (if so
equipped) (P. 2-35)
14. Snow mode switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-37)
15. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-47)
SIC3551
16. Rear control cancel switch (if so
1. Side ventilator (P. 4-28) 4. Security indicator light (P. 2-26) equipped) (P. 2-47) or Climate controlled
2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-5) 5. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33) seat switch (if so equipped)
3. Center ventilator (P. 4-28) 6. Automatic climate control system (P. 2-35)
(P. 4-29) 17. Climate controlled seat switch (if so
equipped) (P. 2-35)
18. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays (P. 2-39)
Instruments and controls 2-3

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
19. CompactFlash card slot (if so equipped)
(P. 4-34)
20. Audio system (P. 4-34)
21. Glove box lid release button (P. 2-41)
22. Trunk release power cancel switch
(P. 3-19)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.

2-4 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
METERS AND GAUGES

*: The needle indicators in the meters and


gauges may move slightly after the ignition
switch is pushed to the LOCK position. This is
not a malfunction.

SIC3605
1. Engine coolant temperature gauge* 6. Meter illumination control knob
2. Tachometer* 7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display
3. Warning/Indicator lights 8. Odometer/twin trip odometer
4. Speedometer* 9. TRIP/RESET knob for twin trip odometer
5. Fuel gauge*

Instruments and controls 2-5

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
Changing the display :
Pushing the TRIP/RESET knob 䊊3 at the bottom
right of the combination meter panel changes
the display as follows:
TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A
Resetting the trip odometer :
Pushing the TRIP/RESET switch 䊊 3 for more
than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.
Average fuel economy and distance to empty
information is also available. (See “HOW TO
SIC3606 USE STATUS BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, cli- SIC3607
mate, audio, phone and voice recognition sys- TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER tems” section.)
Speedometer The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the engine
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in into the red zone 䊊
1 .
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour The scale length and the red zone vary with the
(km/h). engine model.
Odometer/twin trip odometer
CAUTION
The odometer 䊊1 and twin trip odometer 䊊 2 are
When engine speed approaches the red zone,
displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed.
position. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause
The odometer records the total distance the serious engine damage.
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
2-6 Instruments and controls

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal range,
reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature.
If gauge is over the normal range, stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine
is overheated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine. See “IF
YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section for immediate action
required.
SIC3608 SIC3609
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FUEL GAUGE
GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem- in the tank.
perature. The gauge may move slightly during braking,
The engine coolant temperature is within the turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
normal range when the gauge needle points The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
within the zone 䊊
1 shown in the illustration.
ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers
outside air temperature and driving conditions. “E” (Empty).

The low fuel warning 䊊1 appears when


the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it
is convenient, preferably before the gauge

Instruments and controls 2-7

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
reaches “E”. There will be a small reserve of fuel Meter illumination control knob
in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches
“E”. The meter illumination control knob 䊊 1 oper-
ates when the headlight switch is in the AUTO
The indicates that the fuel-filler door is (not lighting) or OFF position with the ignition
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. switch in the ON position.
To adjust the brightness of the meters, push the
CAUTION control knob several times until the desired
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the brightness is achieved.
malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come To turn the ring illumination and needle sweep
on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few on and off, push the control knob and hold it for
driving trips, the light should turn off. 1 second.
If the light remains on after a few driving SIC3610
trips, have the vehicle inspected by an METER/RING ILLUMINATION AND
INFINITI dealer. NEEDLE SWEEP
● For additional information, see “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this section. The ring illumination surrounding meters and
gauges illuminates when the driver’s door is
closed after getting into the vehicle with the
Intelligent Key carried in.
When the engine is started, the indicator
needles will sweep in the speedometer and
tachometer and the ring illumination will be
brightened gradually.

2-8 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
COMPASS (if so equipped)

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass


by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also cali-
brate the compass by driving your vehicle on
your everyday route. The compass will be cali-
brated once it has tracked 3 complete circles.
To turn on and off the compass manually, push
the switch 䊊A while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.

SIC3181
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, the compass display 䊊 B will indicate
the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

Instruments and controls 2-9

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
ZONE VARIATION CHANGE
PROCEDURE
The difference between magnetic north and
geographical north is known as variance. In
some areas, this difference can sometimes be
great enough to cause false compass readings.
Follow these instructions to set the variance for
your particular location if this happens:
1. Push the switch for more than 3
seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance
number on the zone map.

NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
3. Push the switch repeatedly until
the new zone number appears in the
display, then release the switch. After you
release the switch, the display will show a
compass direction within a few seconds.
● If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjustment,
have the compass checked at an INFINITI
dealer.
SIC0611B
Zone map

2-10 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● The compass may not indicate the correct
compass point in tunnels or while driving up
or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to
the correct compass point when the vehicle
moves to an area where the geomagnetism
is stabilized.)

CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which
are attached to the vehicle by means of a
magnet. They affect the operation of the
compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel
or similar material dampened with glass
cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror as it may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-11

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light Lane departure warning light (orange)* Cruise set switch indicator light
(AWD models)*
Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

Automatic Transmission (AT) check Low washer fluid warning light Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
warning light MAIN switch indicator light (green)*
Preview Function warning light Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
(orange)* set switch indicator light*
Brake warning light
Rear Active Steer warning light* Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON
indicator light (green)*
Charge warning light Seat belt warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) Small light indicator lights
indicator light
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system Automatic Transmission (AT) position Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
warning light (orange)* indicator light
Intelligent Key system warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indi-
(green) cator light
*: if so equipped

2-12 Instruments and controls

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
CHECKING BULBS either remain illuminated or blink. (See “ALL-
WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)” in the “5. Starting and or Anti-lock Braking
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake driving” section.) System (ABS)
and push the ignition switch to the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
warning light
CAUTION
will come on: When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
● If the warning light comes on while driving the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
, or , , , there may be a malfunction in the AWD sys-
light illuminates and then turns off. This indi-
, , , , tem. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your
cates the ABS is operational.
vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as
The following lights come on briefly and then go soon as possible. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
off (if so equipped): engine is running, or while driving, it may
● If the AWD warning light blinks while
driving: indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
, or , , ,
Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
, , , , – blinks rapidly (about twice a second):
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
If any light does not come on, it may indicate a Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the
function is turned off. The brake system then
burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec- engine. The driving mode will change to
2WD to prevent the AWD system from operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-
trical system. Have the system checked by an tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting
INFINITI dealer. malfunctioning. If the warning light turns
off, you can drive again. and driving” section.)
WARNING LIGHTS – blinks slowly (about once every 2 sec- Automatic Transmission (AT)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) onds): check warning light
warning light (AWD models) Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
engine. Check that all tire sizes are the position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If
The light comes on when the ignition switch is same, tire pressure is correct and tires are the light comes on at any other time, it may
pushed to the ON position. It turns off soon not worn. indicate the transmission is not functioning
after the engine is started.
● If the warning light is still on after the above properly. Have your INFINITI dealer check and
If the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system malfunc- operations, have your vehicle checked by an repair the transmission.
tions, or the diameter of the front and the rear INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.
wheels are different, the warning light will
Instruments and controls 2-13

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
or Brake warning (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the broken, missing or if the light remains on, see
light brake system checked, and if necessary re- an INFINITI dealer immediately.
This light functions for both the parking brake paired, by an INFINITI dealer promptly. (See
and the foot brake systems. “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” CAUTION
earlier in this section.) Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is
Parking brake indicator :
loose, broken or missing.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, WARNING
the light comes on when the parking brake is ● Your brake system may not be working prop-
applied.
Door open warning light
erly if the warning light is on. Driving could
Low brake fluid warning light : be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive This light comes on when any of the doors are
carefully to the nearest service station for not closed securely while the ignition switch is
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed in the ON position.
the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the because driving it could be dangerous.
light comes on while the engine is running with
● Pressing the brake pedal with the engine Engine oil pressure warning
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle light
stopped and/or low brake fluid level may
and perform the following:
increase your stopping distance and braking
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake will require greater pedal effort as well as This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If
fluid as necessary. (See “BRAKE FLUID” in pedal travel. the light flickers or comes on during normal
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the
section.) ● If the brake fluid level is below the minimum engine immediately and call an INFINITI dealer
or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do or other authorized repair shop.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the not drive until the brake system has been
warning system checked by an INFINITI checked at an INFINITI dealer. The engine oil pressure warning light is not de-
dealer. signed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dip-
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indica- stick to check the oil level. (See “ENGINE OIL” in
Charge warning light
tor : the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
If the light comes on while the engine is run- section.)
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake ning, it may indicate the charging system is not
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System functioning properly. Turn the engine off and
2-14 Instruments and controls

췽—

09/02/08—pattie 墍
Intelligent Key system will sound if the vehicle is traveling close to
CAUTION
either the left or the right of a traveling lane
Running the engine with the engine oil pres- warning light with detectable lane markers.
sure warning light on could cause serious dam- After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
age to the engine almost immediately. Such If the light comes on in orange and remains on,
position, this light comes on for about 2 sec- it may indicate that the LDW and LDP systems
damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the
onds and then turns off. are not functioning properly. Have the systems
engine as soon as it is safe to do so.
This light warns of a malfunction with the checked by an INFINITI dealer.

Intelligent Cruise Control electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent See “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
Key system. SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP)
(ICC) system warning light SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving”
(orange; if so equipped) If the light comes on while the engine is section.
stopped, it may be impossible to free the
This light comes on if there is a malfunction in steering lock or to start the engine. If the light Low fuel warning light
the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system. comes on while the engine is running, you can
drive the vehicle. However in these cases, con- This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
tact an INFINITI dealer for repair as soon as getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the
possible. preferably before the fuel gauge reaches “E”
engine, resume driving and set the ICC system (Empty).
again. See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section. There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in
If it is not possible to set the system or the the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches “E”
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the sys- Lane departure warning light (Empty).
tem is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is (orange; if so equipped)
still driveable under normal conditions, have the Low tire pressure warning
vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer. When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON light
position, the light will come on in orange, turn Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
See “INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) SYS- green, and then turn off. This indicates that the Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the
TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane Depar- tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
ture Prevention (LDP) systems are operational.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
While the LDW and/or LDP system is on, the tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
light will blink in orange and a warning chime functioning properly.
Instruments and controls 2-15

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this light TPMS malfunction :
● If the light illuminates while driving, avoid
illuminates for about 1 second and turns off. sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt brak-
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
Low tire pressure warning : tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi- ing, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires
pushed ON. The light will remain on after 1
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. If may permanently damage the tires and in-
minute. Have the system checked by an INFINITI
you select the tire pressure information in the crease the likelihood of tire failure. Serious
dealer.
display, the LOW PRESSURE information will be vehicle damage could occur and may lead to
displayed. The tire pressure for each tire will For additional information, see “TIRE PRESSURE an accident and could result in serious per-
also be displayed. MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Start- sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for all
ing and driving” section. four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the rec-
When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-
ommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
nates, you should stop and adjust the tire
WARNING Tire and Loading Information label to turn
pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres-
the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the
sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information ● If the light does not illuminate with the igni- light stays on after adjusting the tire pres-
label. The low tire pressure warning light does tion switch pushed ON, have the vehicle sure and driving over 16 MPH (25 km/h), have
not automatically turn off when the tire pres- checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as the system checked by an INFINITI dealer. If
sure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the possible. you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
tire as soon as possible.
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated,
gauge to check the tire pressure. the TPMS will not function and the low tire
pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
For additional information, see “TIRE PRESSURE
mately 1 minute. The light will remain on
MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Start-
after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI dealer
ing and driving” section and “TIRE PRESSURE
as soon as possible for tire replacement
MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case
and/or system resetting.
of emergency” section. For the tire pressure
information display, see “HOW TO USE INFO
BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems” section.
2-16 Instruments and controls

췽—

09/02/08—pattie 墍
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle Seat belt warning light
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the proper in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the
operation of the TPMS. engine, resume driving and set the ICC system The light and chime remind you to fasten seat
again. belts. The light illuminates whenever the igni-
If it is not possible to set the system or the tion switch is pushed to the ON position, and
CAUTION indicator stays on, it may indicate that the sys- will remain illuminated until the driver’s seat
tem is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular will sound for about 6 seconds unless the
tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire still driveable under normal conditions, have the
vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer. driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.
pressure regularly.
The seat belt warning light for the front passen-
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less See “PREVIEW FUNCTION (for Intelligent Cruise
Control (ICC) system equipped models)” in the ger will illuminate if the seat belt is not fastened
than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not
operate correctly. “5. Starting and driving” section. when the front passenger’s seat is occupied.
For 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the
● Be sure to correctly install the specified size Rear Active Steer warning ON position, the system does not activate the
of tires to the four wheels. light (if so equipped) warning light for the front passenger.
If the light comes on while the engine is run- See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
Low washer fluid warning ning, it may indicate that there is a malfunction seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
light with the Rear Active Steer portion of the steer- section for precautions on seat belt usage.
ing system. Have the system checked by an
This light comes on when the washer tank fluid Supplemental air bag
INFINITI dealer.
is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. warning light
See “WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8. Main- For further information about the Rear Active
tenance and do-it-yourself” section. Steer system, see “REAR ACTIVE STEER SYS- After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. position, the supplemental air bag warning
Preview Function warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the Rear
light (orange; if so equipped) Active Steer function will cease but driving can
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds
if the supplemental front air bag and supple-
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in be continued.
mental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag
the Brake Assist (with Preview Function) If the light comes on while you are driving, con- systems and/or pretensioner seat belt are op-
system. tact an INFINITI dealer for repair. erational.
Instruments and controls 2-17

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
If any of the following conditions occur, the INDICATOR LIGHTS cruise control main switch indicator light comes
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and on, the cruise control system is operational.
pretensioner systems need servicing and your
Adaptive Front lighting
vehicle must be taken to your nearest INFINITI System (AFS) indicator light Cruise set switch indicator
dealer. When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON light
position, the Adaptive Front lighting System The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
● The supplemental air bag warning light re- (AFS) indicator light will illuminate. The light controlled by the cruise control system. If the
mains on after approximately 7 seconds. will turn off in about 1 second if the AFS is light blinks while the engine is running, it may
● The supplemental air bag warning light operational. indicate the cruise control system is not func-
flashes intermittently. This light also comes on when the AFS is turned tioning properly. Have the system checked by
● The supplemental air bag warning light does off by pushing the OFF side of the AFS switch. an INFINITI dealer.
not come on at all. If the AFS indicator light blinks, it may indicate Front passenger air bag
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental the AFS is not functioning properly. Have the status light
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
The front passenger air bag status light ( )
pretensioners may not function properly. See “Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)” later will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
For additional information, see “SUPPLEMENTAL in this section. OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety — Seats, Automatic Transmission (AT) is being used.
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
section.
position indicator light For front passenger air bag status light opera-
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON tion, see “INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM
position, the indicator shows the automatic (front seats)” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
WARNING
selector shift position. (See “AUTOMATIC belts and supplemental restraint system” sec-
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, TRANSMISSION” in the “5. Starting and driving” tion of this manual.
it could mean that the front air bag, side air section.)
bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner sys- High beam indicator light
tems will not operate in an accident. To help Cruise main switch indicator (blue)
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your light (green)
vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon The light comes on when the cruise control This light comes on when the headlight high
as possible. main switch is pushed. The light goes out when beam is on and goes out when the low beam is
the main switch is pushed again. When the selected.
2-18 Instruments and controls

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
Intelligent Cruise Control Malfunction Indicator Light Operation :
(ICC) system MAIN switch (MIL) The malfunction indicator light will come on in
indicator light (green; if so one of two ways:
If the malfunction indicator light comes on
equipped) steady or blinks while the engine is running, it ● Malfunction indicator light on steady — An
may indicate a potential emission control mal- emission control system malfunction has
The light comes on when the Intelligent Cruise function. been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If
Control (ICC) system MAIN switch is pushed. the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
The light goes out when the MAIN switch is The malfunction indicator light may also come
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or or install the cap and continue to drive the
pushed again. While the MAIN switch indicator
light comes on, the ICC system is operational. missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check vehicle. The light should turn off after
to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and a few driving trips. If the light does
Lane Departure Prevention closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least not turn off after a few driving trips, have the
(LDP) ON indicator light 3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. vehicle inspected by an INFINITI dealer. You
(green; if so equipped) After a few driving trips, the light should do not need to have your vehicle towed to
turn off if no other potential emission control the dealer.
The light comes on in green when the Lane
Departure Prevention (LDP) system is turned on.
system malfunction exists. ● Malfunction indicator light blinking — An
The light turns off when the system is turned If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds engine misfire has been detected which may
off. and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine damage the emission control system.
is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is To reduce or avoid emission control system
NOTE: not ready for an emission control system damage:
inspection/maintenance test. (See “READINESS
This light is common with the lane departure FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST” in a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72
warning light (orange). (See “Lane departure the “9. Technical and consumer information” km/h).
warning light” earlier in this section.) section.) b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
For more details, see “LANE DEPARTURE WARN-
ING (LDW) SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVEN- c) Avoid steep uphill grades.
TION (LDP) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo
driving” section. being hauled or towed.

Instruments and controls 2-19

췽—

09/02/08—pattie 墍
The malfunction indicator light may stop Vehicle Dynamic Control Light reminder chime
blinking and remain on.
(VDC) off indicator light A chime will sound when the driver side door is
Have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI opened with the light switch in the or
dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle The light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic
towed to the dealer. Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This position, and the ignition switch is
indicates that the VDC system is not operating. pushed to the ACC position.
CAUTION When the VDC off indicator light and slip indi-
Turn the light switch off when you leave the
cator light come on with the VDC system turned
Continued vehicle operation without having vehicle.
on, this light alerts the driver to the fact that the
the emission control system checked and re- VDC system’s fail-safe mode is operating, for Parking brake reminder chime
paired as necessary could lead to poor drive- example the VDC system may not be function-
ability, reduced fuel economy, and possible ing properly. Have the system checked by an The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven at
damage to the emission control system. more than 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking
INFINITI dealer. If a malfunction occurs in the
system, the VDC system function will be can- brake applied. Stop the vehicle and release the
Slip indicator light celed but the vehicle is still driveable. For parking brake.
additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC Seat belt warning chime
This light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and
Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting driving” section of this manual. The chime will sound for about 6 seconds
the driver to the fact that the road surface is unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fas-
slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction AUDIBLE REMINDERS tened.
limits.
Key reminder chime Brake pad wear warning
Small light indicator light
A chime will sound if the driver side door is The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
The light comes on when the front park, side opened while the ignition switch is pushed to ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
marker, tail and license plate lights are on. the ACC or LOCK position with the Intelligent will make a high pitched scraping sound when
Key left in the Intelligent Key port. Make sure the vehicle is in motion whether or not the
Turn signal/hazard indicator the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
lights position, and take the Intelligent Key with you checked as soon as possible if the warning
The light flashes when the turn signal switch when leaving the vehicle. sound is heard.
lever or hazard switch is turned on.
2-20 Instruments and controls

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

Lane departure warning chime (if so ● Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
equipped) – “INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) SYS-
When the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) or TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving”
Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system is on, section.
the chime sounds if the vehicle is traveling ● Intelligent Key system
close to either the left or the right of a traveling
– “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.
lane with detectable lane markers.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
See “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) tion.
SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP)
– “PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the
SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
“5. Starting and driving” section.
tion for more details.
SIC3611
The dot matrix liquid crystal display 䊊 1 is
located under the tachometer, and it displays
the Automatic Transmission (AT) position indi-
cator, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
(if so equipped) information and the Intelligent
Key operation information.
For detailed information about each system, see
the following sections:
● Automatic Transmission (AT)
– “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AU-
DIBLE REMINDERS” earlier in this section.
– “DRIVING THE VEHICLE” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.

Instruments and controls 2-21

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
INDICATORS FOR OPERATION
1. Engine start operation indicator
(ignition switch in the LOCK or ACC
position)
This indicator appears when the selector lever
is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start
by pushing the ignition switch with the brake
pedal depressed.
2. Engine start operation indicator
(ignition switch in the ON position)
This indicator appears when the ignition switch
is in the ON position with the selector lever in
the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start
by pushing the ignition switch with the brake
pedal depressed.
3. Steering lock release malfunction
indicator
This indicator appears when the steering wheel
cannot be released from the LOCK position.
If this indicator appears, push the ignition
switch while lightly turning the steering wheel
SIC2765 right and left.

2-22 Instruments and controls

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
4. Intelligent Key insertion indicator When all the doors are closed, an outside chime To push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
and inside warning chime will also sound. tion, perform the following procedure:
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key
needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre- SHIFT “P” warning → (Move the selector lever
port. (For example, the Intelligent Key battery is driving checks and adjustments” section. to “P”) → LOCK warning → (Push the ignition
discharged.) switch → ignition switch position is turned to
7. SHIFT “P” warning
ON) → LOCK warning → (Push the ignition
If this indicator appears, insert the Intelligent This warning appears when the ignition switch switch → ignition switch position is turned to
Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct is pushed to stop the engine with the selector LOCK)
direction. (See “PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION lever in any position except the P (Park) posi-
SWITCH” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec- tion. 9. NO KEY ID indicator
tion.)
If this warning appears, move the selector lever This indicator appears when the ignition switch
5. Intelligent Key removal indicator to the P (Park) position or push the ignition is pushed and the Intelligent Key cannot be
switch to the ON position. recognized by the system with the ignition
This indicator appears when the driver’s door is switch in the LOCK position.
opened with the ignition switch in the LOCK An inside warning chime will also sound.
position and the Intelligent Key placed in the See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre- If this indicator appears, you cannot start the
Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime also driving checks and adjustments” section. engine. Check for the following causes and
sounds. perform remedies:
8. “LOCK” warning
If this indicator appears, remove the Intelligent ● The battery of the Intelligent Key carried with
Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with This warning appears when the selector lever is you is discharged completely. Replace the
you when leaving the vehicle. moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition battery with a new one.
switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P”
● The Intelligent Key carried with you is not
6. NO KEY warning warning appears.
registered to the system. Use the registered
The warning appears when the door is closed Intelligent Key.
with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle ● You do not have an Intelligent Key with you.
and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON Carry an Intelligent Key with you.
position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-23

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SECURITY SYSTEMS

10. Intelligent Key battery discharge VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM


indicator The vehicle security system provides visual and
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key audio alarm signals if someone opens the
battery is running out of power. doors, hood, or trunk lid when the system is
armed. It is not, however, a motion detection
If this indicator appears, replace the battery type system that activates when a vehicle is
with a new one. (See “BATTERY REPLACEMENT” moved or when a vibration occurs.
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion.) The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior
or exterior vehicle components in all situations.
Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
SIC2132 brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s)
in the vehicle, and always lock it when unat-
Your vehicle has two types of security systems, tended. Be aware of your surroundings, and
as follows: park in secure, well-lit areas whenever pos-
sible.
● Vehicle security system
Many devices offering additional protection,
● INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System such as component locks, identification mark-
The security condition will be shown by the ers, and tracking systems, are available at auto
security indicator light. supply stores and specialty shops. Your INFINITI
dealer may also offer such equipment. Check
with your insurance company to see if you may
be eligible for discounts for various theft pro-
tection features.

2-24 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
5. Confirm that the security indicator light The alarm is activated by:
䊊A comes on. The security indicator light
● Unlocking the door or opening the trunk lid
stays on for about 30 seconds. The ve-
without using the button on the Intelligent
hicle security system is now pre-armed.
After about 30 seconds the vehicle secu- Key, the door handle request switch or the
rity system automatically shifts into the mechanical key. (Even if the door is opened
armed phase. The security light begins to by releasing the door inside lock knob, the
flash once every approximately 3 sec- alarm will activate.)
onds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm ● Opening the hood.
time period, the door is unlocked, or the
ignition switch is pushed to ACC or ON, How to stop an activated alarm
the system will not arm.
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by
SIC2766 Even when the driver and/or passengers are in pushing the unlock button on the Intel-
the vehicle, the system will activate with all
How to arm the vehicle security doors, hood, and trunk lid locked with the igni-
ligent Key, the door handle request switch or
system using the mechanical key. The alarm will not
tion switch in the LOCK position. When pushing
stop if the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC
1. Close all windows. the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, the
or ON position.
system will be released.
The system can be armed even if the windows If the system does not operate as described
are open. Vehicle security system activation above, have it checked by an INFINITI dealer.
2. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK The vehicle security system will give the follow-
position. ing alarm: INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve- ● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
SYSTEM
hicle. intermittently. The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
4. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all ● The alarm automatically turns off after ap- allow the engine to start without the use of the
doors. The doors can be locked with the proximately 1 minute. However, the alarm registered Intelligent Key.
Intelligent Key, door handle request reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for
switch, power door lock switch or me- again. INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT
chanical key. ASSY - CARD SLOT)

Instruments and controls 2-25

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is
Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera- malfunctioning, this light will remain on while
tion is subject to the following two conditions; the ignition switch is in the ON position.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- If the light still remains on and/or the engine will
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- not start, see an INFINITI dealer for INFINITI Ve-
ference received, including interference that hicle Immobilizer System service as soon as
may cause undesired operation of the device. possible. Please bring all registered Intelligent
Keys that you have when visiting an INFINITI
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY
dealer for service.
APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR
COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHOR-
ITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.
SIC2766
Security indicator light
The security indicator light indicates the status
of the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.
The light 䊊A blinks when the ignition switch is
in the ACC or LOCK position. This function
indicates that the security systems equipped on
the vehicle are operational.

2-26 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Push the lever up 䊊 4 to have one sweep


WARNING
operation of the wiper.
In freezing temperatures the washer solution
may freeze on the windshield and obscure your Pull the lever toward you 䊊 5 to operate the

vision which may lead to an accident. Warm washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
windshield with the defroster before you wash times.
the windshield.

CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continuously for
more than 30 seconds.
SIC3886
● Do not operate the washer if the reservoir
tank is empty. The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank
with washer fluid concentrates at full Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
strength. Some methyl alcohol based following speed:
washer fluid concentrates may permanently
stain the grille if spilled while filling the win- 䊊
1 INT (intermittent) — rain-sensing auto wiper
system operation (See “RAIN-SENSING
dow washer reservoir tank.
AUTO WIPER SYSTEM” later in this section.)
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with wa-
ter to the manufacturer’s recommended lev- 䊊
2 LO (low) — continuous low speed operation
els before pouring the fluid into the window
washer reservoir tank. Do not use the win-

3 HI (high) — continuous high speed operation

dow washer reservoir tank to mix the washer


fluid concentrate and water.

Instruments and controls 2-27

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR
DEFROSTER SWITCH

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off,


push up the lever to the OFF position, or pull
down the lever to the LO or HI position.

CAUTION
Do not touch the rain sensor and around it when
the wiper switch is in the INT position and the
ignition switch is in the ON position. The wipers
may operate unexpectedly and cause to an in-
jury or a wiper damage.

● The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for


SIC3887 SIC2767B
use during rain. If the switch is left in the INT
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYSTEM position, the wipers may operate unexpect- To defog/defrost the rear window glass and
edly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects outside mirrors (if so equipped with defroster),
The rain-sensing auto wiper system can auto- are stuck on or around the sensor. The wipers
matically turn on the wipers and adjust the start the engine and push the switch on. The
wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the
may also operate when exhaust gas or mois- indicator light 䊊
1 will come on. Push the switch
ture affect the rain sensor. again to turn the defroster off.
vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located
on the upper part of the windshield. ● The rain-sensing auto wipers may not oper- It will automatically turn off in approximately 15
ate if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if minutes.
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push it is raining.
the lever down to the INT (intermittent) position
䊊1 . The wiper will sweep once while the ignition CAUTION
switch is in the ON position. When cleaning the inner side of the rear win-
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted dow, be careful not to scratch or damage the
by turning the knob toward the front 䊊 2 (High) rear window defroster.
or toward the rear 䊊3 (Low).

● High — High sensitive operation


● Low — Low sensitive operation
2-28 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

XENON HEADLIGHTS ● The life of xenon headlights will be shortened


by frequent on-off operation. It is generally
WARNING desirable not to turn off the headlights for
short intervals (for example, when the ve-
hicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the
HIGH VOLTAGE daytime running lights are active (Canada
only), the xenon headlights do not turn on.
● When xenon headlights are on, they produce This way the life of the xenon headlights is
a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, not reduced.
never attempt to modify or disassemble.
Always have your xenon headlights replaced ● If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burn-
at an INFINITI dealer. ing out, the brightness will drastically de-
crease, the light will start blinking, or the
● Xenon headlights provide considerably more color of the light will become reddish. If one SIC2411
light than conventional headlights. If they or more of the above signs appear, contact an
are not correctly aimed, they might INFINITI dealer.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the Lighting
driver ahead of you and cause a serious
accident. If headlights are not aimed 䊊
1 Turn the switch to the position:
correctly, immediately take your vehicle to The front park, side marker, tail, license
an INFINITI dealer and have the headlights plate and instrument lights will come on.
adjusted correctly. 䊊 Turn the switch to the
2 position:
Headlights will come on and all the other
lights remain on.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,
its brightness or color varies slightly. However,
the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

Instruments and controls 2-29

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
The autolight system can turn on the headlights
automatically when it is dark and turn off the
headlights when it is light.
If the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK
position and one of the doors is opened and
this condition is continued, the headlights re-
main on for 5 minutes.
Automatic headlights off delay
You can keep the headlights on for up to 180
seconds after you push the ignition switch to
LOCK and open any door then close all the
SIC2412 doors. SAA0642A
Autolight system You can adjust the period of the automatic Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo
headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180 sensor 䊊 A located on the top of the instrument
The autolight system allows the headlights to panel. The photo sensor controls the autolight;
seconds.
be set so they turn on and off automatically. if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is
For automatic headlights off delay setting, see dark and the headlights will illuminate.
To set the autolight system: “Comfort & Conv. settings” in the “4. Monitor,
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the climate, audio, phone and voice recognition
AUTO position 䊊
1 . systems” section.
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
3. The autolight system automatically turns
the headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch
to the OFF, , or position.

2-30 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch headlight switch to the position for full
has been pushed to the LOCK position. illumination when driving at night.
● When the headlight switch remains in the If the parking brake is applied before the engine
or position after the lights is started, the daytime running lights do not
automatically turn off, the lights will turn on illuminate. The daytime running lights illumi-
when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON nate once the parking brake is released. The
position. daytime running lights will remain on until the
ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position.
CAUTION
● When you turn on the headlight switch again WARNING
after the lights automatically turn off, the When the daytime running light system is ac-
SIC2413 lights will not turn off automatically. Be sure tive, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
to turn the light switch to the OFF position necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights.
Headlight beam select when you leave the vehicle for extended pe- Failure to do so could cause an accident injur-
riods of time, otherwise the battery will be

1 To select the low beam, put the lever in the
discharged.
ing yourself and others.
neutral position as shown.
● Never leave the light switch on when the

2 To select the high beam, push the lever engine is not running for extended periods of Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)
forward while the switch is in the time even if the headlights turn off The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) will
position. Pull it back to select the low beam. automatically. automatically adjust the headlights (low beam)

3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash the toward the turning direction to improve the
driver’s view. When the headlight switch is ON
headlight high beam even when the head- Daytime running light system
light switch is in the OFF position. (Canada only) and the driver operates the steering wheel in a
turn, the AFS system will be activated.
Battery saver system The daytime running lights automatically illumi-
nate when the engine is started with the park- The AFS will operate:
● When the headlight switch is in the or ing brake released. The daytime running lights ● when the headlight switch is ON.
position while the ignition switch is in operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
the ON position, the lights will automatically position or in the position. Turn the
Instruments and controls 2-31

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● when the selector lever is in any position
other than P (Park) or R (Reverse).
● when the vehicle is driven at above 16 MPH
(25 km/h) for the left-side headlight. Note
that the right-side low beam headlight will
swivel but the left side will not swivel when
the vehicle is at a stop and the steering
wheel is turned. The vehicle must attain a
speed above 16 MPH (25 km/h) before AFS
activates the left-side headlight.

SIC2645 SIC3554
To turn the AFS off, push the OFF side of the AFS Instrument brightness control
switch. (The AFS OFF indicator light will illumi-
nate.) Push the ON side of the switch to turn the The instrument brightness control operates
system on again. when the light switch is in the AUTO (when
lighting), or position with the
AFS will also adjust the headlight to a proper ignition switch in the ON position.
axis automatically, depending on the number of
occupants in the vehicle, the load the vehicle is Turn the control to the darkening direction 䊊
1
carrying and the road conditions. or the brightening direction 䊊2 to adjust the
brightness of instrument panel lights.
If the AFS OFF indicator light blinks after the
ignition switch has been pushed to the ON When the control is turned to the upper end, the
position, this may indicate that the AFS is not light intensity will be at maximum. When the
functioning properly. Have the system checked control is turned to the lower end, the light will
by an INFINITI dealer. When the engine is be turned off.
started, the headlights will vibrate to check the
system condition. This is not a malfunction.

2-32 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

SIC2231 SIC2465 SIC2574


TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-

1 Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight tions. All turn signal lights will flash.
switch to the position, then turn the
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning
direction. When the turn is completed, the turn switch to the position. To turn them off, WARNING
signals cancel automatically. turn the switch to the OFF position.
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

2 Lane change signal The headlights must be on for the fog lights to
operate.
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers while
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or moving on the highway unless unusual cir-
down to the point where lights begin flashing. cumstances force you to drive so slowly that
your vehicle might become a hazard to other
traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the hazard
warning flasher lights are on.

Instruments and controls 2-33

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
HORN HEATED SEATS (rear seats) (if so
equipped)

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition CAUTION


switch in any position.
● The battery could run down if the seat heater
Some state laws may prohibit the use of the is operated while the engine is not running.
hazard warning flasher switch while driving.
● Do not use the seat heater for extended pe-
riods or when no one is using the seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which insu-
lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat
cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on the
SIC2769 seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.
This may result in damage to the heater.
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel. ● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should
be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
WARNING ● When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline,
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could thinner, or any similar materials.
affect proper operation of the supplemental ● If any malfunctions are found or the heated
front air bag system. Tampering with the seat does not operate, turn the switch off
supplemental front air bag system may result and have the system checked by an INFINITI
in serious personal injury. dealer.

2-34 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (front seats)

3. To turn off the heater, push the HI or LO


side (which is selected) of the switch.
Make sure the indicator light turns off.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or
before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn
off the switch.

SIC2770 SIC2771
The rear outboard seats are warmed by built-in The climate controlled seat warms up or cools
heaters. The switches located on the inside of down the front seats by blowing warm or cool
the rear center armrest can be operated inde- air from the surface of the seat. The switches
pendently of each other. located on the center console can be operated
1. Start the engine. independently of each other.
2. Select heat range. 1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the control knob 䊊 A to the H (Heat)

1 For high heat, push the HI (High) side of
side 䊊1 or to the C (Cool) side 䊊 2 . The
the switch. indicator light 䊊
B on the control knob will


2 For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of illuminate.
the switch. 3. Adjust the desired amount of the air using
the control knob 䊊A .
The indicator light in the switch 䊊 3 will
illuminate when low or high is selected. The climate controlled seat blower remains
on low speed for approximately 60 seconds
after turning the switch on or selecting the
desired temperature.
Instruments and controls 2-35

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SWITCH
(if so equipped)

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or ● The climate controlled seat has an air filter.
cooled, and/or before you leave the ve- Do not operate climate controlled seat with-
hicle, be sure to turn the control knob to out an air filter. This may result in damage to
the OFF position (center). The indicator the system.
light 䊊B on the control knob goes off at
the OFF position. ● When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline,
thinner, or any similar materials.
To check the air filter for the climate con-
● If any malfunctions are found or the climate
trolled seat, contact an INFINITI dealer.
controlled seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked by
CAUTION an INFINITI dealer.
● The battery could run down if the climate
controlled seat is operated while the engine SSD0671
is not running. The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system will
● Do not use the climate controlled seat for sound a warning chime and blink the lane
extended periods or when no one is using departure warning light (orange) to alert
the seat. the driver if the vehicle is traveling close to
● Do not put anything on the seat which insu- either the left or the right of a traveling lane
lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat with detectable lane markers.
cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become
The LDW system activates automatically when
overheated.
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON posi-
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on the tion. (This is the automatic setting mode.) The
seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. LDW ON indicator 䊊 1 on the switch will illumi-
This may result in damage to the climate nate.
controlled seat.
To cancel the LDW system, push the LDW switch
● Any liquid spilled on the seat should be re- to turn off the system. The LDW ON indicator 䊊
1
moved immediately with a dry cloth.
will turn off.

2-36 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SNOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF
SWITCH

Push the LDW switch again to turn the LDW


system on. The LDW automatic setting mode
can be changed to the manual setting mode. To
change the mode, push and hold the LDW
switch for more than 4 seconds when the LDW
ON indicator is off. In the manual setting mode,
push the LDW switch on and off to turn the LDW
system on and off.
See “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP)
SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
tion for more details.
SIC3602 SIC1881
For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
roads or slippery areas, turn on the SNOW Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most
mode switch. The indicator light 䊊 1 on the driving conditions.
switch will illuminate. When the SNOW mode is
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
activated, engine output is controlled to avoid
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin.
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
Turn off the SNOW mode for normal driving. even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.
If maximum engine power is needed to free a
stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The indicator will illuminate.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE
DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.)

Instruments and controls 2-37

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
CLOCK POWER OUTLETS

The power outlets are located on the back side


and inside (if equipped) of the center console
for powering electrical accessories such as a
cellular telephone.

CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
● Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12
volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use
double adapters or more than one electrical
accessory.
SIC2772 SIC2773
If the power supply is disconnected, the clock ● Use power outlet with the engine running to
will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
time. ● Avoid using power outlet when the air condi-
tioner, headlights or rear window defroster
ADJUSTING THE TIME is on.
1. To set the clock forward, push the button
● This power outlet is not designed for use
䊊1 .
with a cigarette lighter unit.
2. To set the clock backward, push the but-
ton 䊊2 . ● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good
contact is not made, the plug may overheat
3. To move forward or backward faster, push or the internal temperature fuse may open.
and hold the button more than 5 seconds.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be
For details about display clock adjustment (if so sure the electrical accessory being used is
equipped), see “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” turned OFF.
in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
SIC2774
voice recognition systems” section. ● When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do
Only for model without DVD player not allow water to contact the outlet.

2-38 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAYS

CAUTION
● The cigarette lighter socket is a power
source for the cigarette lighter element only.
The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a
power source for any other accessory is not
recommended.
● Do not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter.

SIC2775B SIC3693
FRONT REAR
To open the ashtray lid, push the lid down and To open the ashtray lid, pull 䊊
1 .
release it 䊊
1 .
To empty the ashtray, and pull out 䊊
2 .
To empty the ashtray, pull out 䊊
2 .

The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition


switch is in the ON position.
Push the lighter in all the way 䊊 3 , then release
it. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out.
Return the lighter to its original position after
use.

Instruments and controls 2-39

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
STORAGE

CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the
cup holder is being used to prevent spilling
the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you
or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard
objects can injure you in an accident.

SIC2777B SIC2778B
Front Rear — Type A

Front Rear
To open the cup holder, push the lid down and Type A
release it 䊊
1 .
Push the button as illustrated on the rear center
To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull it up armrest to use the cup holder.
as illustrated 䊊
2 .

2-40 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SIC2875 SIC2779B SIC2930A
Rear — Type B SUNGLASSES HOLDER GLOVE BOX
Type B WARNING WARNING
Open the lid of the rear center armrest to use Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driv- Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help
the cup holder. ing to prevent an accident. prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

To open the sunglasses holder, push 䊊


1 . To open the glove box, push the glove box lid
release button 䊊
1 .
CAUTION To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.
● Do not use for anything other than glasses.
To lock 䊊
2 /unlock 䊊 3 the glove box, use the
● Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage,
holder while parking in direct sunlight. The see “KEYS” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
heat may damage the glasses. adjustments” section.

Instruments and controls 2-41

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SIC2781A SIC2782A
Model with DVD player Model without DVD player

CONSOLE BOX Model without DVD player When the lever 䊊 2 (driver’s seat side) is pulled,

Model with DVD player the upper case is available for storing some
To open the console box lid, pull the lever 䊊
2 or small items. When the lever 䊊 3 (front passen-
To open the console box lid, pull the lever 䊊
1 . 䊊3 and pull up the lid. ger’s seat side) is pulled, the bottom case is
available for storing some larger ones.
To close, push the lid down until the lock
latches. To close, push the lid down until the lock
latches.

2-42 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in
motion and before closing the windows. Use
the window lock switch to prevent unex-
pected use of the power windows.
● Do not leave children unattended inside the
vehicle. They could unknowingly activate
switches or controls and become trapped in
SIC2077A SIC2784 the window. Unattended children could be-
come involved in serious accidents.
COAT HOOKS CARGO NET
The coat hooks are equipped beside the rear The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo The power windows operate when the ignition
personal lights. area from moving around while your vehicle is switch is in the ON position or for about 45
driven.
To use the coat hook, push the hook 䊊
A to seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to
release. To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the the LOCK position. If the driver’s or front pas-
retainers 䊊 A . senger’s door is opened during this period of
CAUTION about 45 seconds, power to the windows is
CAUTION canceled.
Do not place items which are more than 2 lb (1
kg) on the hook. Avoid keeping heavy objects in the net.

Instruments and controls 2-43

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Locking passengers’ windows
When the lock button 䊊 C is pushed in, only the
driver side window can be opened or closed.
Push it in again to cancel.

SIC3279 SIC3241
Main power window switch (driver’s Passenger side power window switch
side) The passenger side switch will open or close
1. Driver side window only the corresponding window. To open or
close the window, push down or pull up the
2. Front passenger side window
switch and hold it.
3. Rear left passenger side window
4. Rear right passenger side window
5. Window lock button
To open or close the window, push down 䊊 A or
pull up 䊊 B the switch and hold it. The main
switch (driver side switches) will open or close
all the windows.

2-44 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Auto reverse function If the windows do not close
automatically
WARNING
If the power window automatic function (closing
There are some small distances immediately only) does not operate properly, perform the
before the closed position which cannot be de- following procedure to initialize the power win-
tected. Make sure that all passengers have dow system.
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before clos-
1. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
ing the window.
tion.
2. Close the door.
If the control unit detects something caught in
the window as it is closing, the window will be 3. Open the window completely by operating
immediately lowered. the power window switch.
SIC3289
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it
Automatic operation (for all door The auto reverse function can be activated when to close the window, and then hold the
windows) the window is closed by automatic operation switch more than 3 seconds after the
when the ignition switch is in the ON position or window is closed completely.
To fully open or close the window, completely for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is
push down or pull up the switch and release it; pushed to the LOCK position. 5. Release the power window switch. Oper-
ate the window by the automatic function
it need not be held. The window will automati- Depending on the environment or driving condi- to confirm the initialization is complete.
cally open or close all the way. To stop the tions, the auto reverse function may be activated
window, just push or lift the switch in the 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other
if an impact or load similar to something being
opposite direction. windows.
caught in the window occurs.
A light push or pull on the switch will cause the If the power window automatic function does
window to open or close until the switch is not operate properly after performing the pro-
cedure above, have your vehicle checked by an
released.
INFINITI dealer.

Instruments and controls 2-45

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
MOONROOF

To stop the roof, push the switch once more


WARNING
while it is opening or closing.
● In an accident you could be thrown from the
vehicle through an open moonroof. Always Auto reverse function
use seat belts and child restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend
WARNING
any portion of their body out of the moonroof There are some small distances immediately
opening while the vehicle is in motion or before the closed position which cannot be de-
while the moonroof is closing. tected. Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before clos-
ing the moonroof.
CAUTION
SIC3888
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from If the control unit detects something caught in
the moonroof before opening. Sunshade the moonroof when it is closing, the moonroof
● Do not place any heavy object on the moon- will be immediately opened.
The sunshade will open automatically when the
roof or surrounding area. moonroof is opened. However, it must be The auto reverse function can be activated when
closed manually. the moonroof is closed by automatic operation
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF when the ignition switch is in the ON position or
Tilting the moonroof for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is
The moonroof only operates when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push pushed to the LOCK position.
the OPEN 䊊 1 side of the moonroof switch and
If the moonroof cannot be closed automatically
The automatic moonroof is operational for
release it; it need not be held. To tilt down the when the auto reverse function activates due to
about 45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is
moonroof, push the CLOSE 䊊 2 side.
a malfunction, push and hold the CLOSE 䊊 2
pushed to the LOCK position. If the driver’s door
or the passenger’s door is opened during this Sliding the moonroof side of the moonroof switch.
period of about 45 seconds, power to the
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the Depending on the environment or driving condi-
moonroof is canceled.
OPEN 䊊 1 or CLOSE 䊊 2 side of the moonroof tions, the auto reverse function may be activated
switch and release it; it need not be held. The if an impact or load similar to something being
roof will automatically open or close all the way. caught in the moonroof occurs.
2-46 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
REAR CONTROL CANCEL SWITCH (if so REAR SUNSHADE (if so equipped)
equipped)

If the moonroof does not operate CAUTION


If the moonroof does not operate properly, ● To avoid personal injury, keep your hands,
perform the following procedure to initialize the fingers and head away from the sunshade
moonroof operation system. arm, arm rail and screen inlet port.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by ● Do not allow children near the rear sunshade
repeatedly pushing the CLOSE 䊊 2 side of
system. They could be injured.
the moonroof switch.
● Do not place objects on or near the rear sun-
2. Push and hold the CLOSE 䊊 2 side of the
shade. This could cause improper operation
moonroof switch to tilt the moonroof up.
or damage it.
3. Release the moonroof switch after the
moonroof moves slightly up and down. ● Do not pull or push the rear sunshade. This
could cause improper operation or damage
4. Push and hold the OPEN 䊊 1 side of the SIC2786
it.
moonroof switch to fully tilt the moonroof
The rear control cancel switch is located on the
down.
center console.
5. Check if the moonroof switch operates
normally. Pushing the rear control cancel switch to the
cancel side will deactivate the following
If the moonroof does not operate properly after switches in the rear center armrest.
performing the procedure above, have your
vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer. ● Automatic climate control
● Audio

Instruments and controls 2-47

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
INTERIOR LIGHTS

CAUTION CAUTION
● Do not place objects (such as newspapers, Do not use for extended periods of time with
handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen inlet port. the engine stopped. This could result in a dis-
Doing so may entangle these objects in the charged battery.
screen when it is extending or retracting,
causing improper operation or damage to
the screen.
● Do not push the sunshade arm with your
hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper
operation or damage to the screen may
result.
SIC2787 ● Do not put any object into the screen inlet
The rear sunshade operates when the ignition port as this may result in improper operation
switch is in the ON position. or damage the screen.
The rear sunshade switches are located on the ● Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this
center console and inside the rear armrest. may result in improper operation or damage
the screen.
To raise the screen, push the UP side of the
switch 䊊1 . ● Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing so
may elongate the screen. Improper opera-
To lower the screen, push the DOWN side of the tion or damage to the screen may result.
switch 䊊2 . The switch need not be held.

2-48 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SIC3889 SIC2789 SIC3890
MAP LIGHTS PERSONAL LIGHTS INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Push the button as illustrated to turn the light Rear The interior light control switch has two posi-
on or off. tions: DOOR and OFF.
Push the button as illustrated to turn the light
on or off. DOOR position
When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊1 , the
map lights and rear personal lights will illumi-
nate under the following conditions:
● ignition switch is in the LOCK position
– remain on for about 15 seconds.

Instruments and controls 2-49

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS

● doors are unlocked by pushing the UNLOCK When the auto interior illumination is set to the
button on the Intelligent Key or door OFF position (see “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND
handle request switch with the ignition SETTINGS” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,
switch in the LOCK position phone and voice recognition systems” section),
the lights will illuminate under the following
– remain on for about 15 seconds. condition:
● any door is opened and then closed with the ● any door is opened with the ignition switch
ignition switch in the LOCK position in any position
– remain on for about 15 seconds. – remain on while the door is opened.
● any door is opened with the ignition switch When the door is closed, the lights go off.
in the ACC or ON position
OFF position
– remain on while the door is opened. SIC2555B
When the door is closed, the lights go off. When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
2 , the
lights will not illuminate, regardless of the The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when
The lights will turn off after 30 minutes when the condition. the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.
lights remain illuminated to prevent the battery When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.
from becoming discharged.
The lights will turn off after 30 minutes when the
lights remain illuminated to prevent the battery
from becoming discharged.

2-50 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINK姞 UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver provides a
WARNING
opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light convenient way to consolidate the functions of
will turn off. up to three individual hand-held transmitters ● Do not use HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver
into one built-in device. with any garage door opener that lacks
The light will turn off after 30 minutes when the safety stop and reverse features as required
light remains illuminated to prevent the battery HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver: by federal safety standards. (These stan-
from becoming discharged. dards became effective for opener models
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) de-
vices such as garage doors, gates, home and manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage
office lighting, entry door locks and security door opener which cannot detect an object in
the path of a closing garage door and then
systems.
automatically stop and reverse, does not
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No meet current federal safety standards. Using
separate batteries are required. If the vehi- a garage door opener without these features
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- increases the risk of serious injury or death.
nected, HomeLink姞 will retain all program- ● During programming procedure, your garage
ming. door or security gate may open or close.
Once HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver is pro- Make sure that people and objects are clear
grammed, retain the original transmitter for fu- of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are
ture programming procedures (Example: new ve- programming.
hicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the ● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off
programmed HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver while programming HomeLink姞 Universal
buttons should be erased for security purposes. Transceiver.
For additional information, see “PROGRAMMING
HomeLink姞” later in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-51

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK姞
To program your HomeLink姞 Transceiver to op-
erate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener,
home or office lighting, you need to be at the
same location as the device. Note: Garage door
openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling
code protection”. To program a garage door
opener equipped with “rolling code protection”;
you will need to use a ladder to get up to the
garage door opener motor to be able to access
the “smart or learn” program button.

SIC3612 SIC3613
1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer 3. Using both hands, simultaneously push
HomeLink姞 buttons (to clear the memory) and hold both the HomeLink姞 button you
until the indicator light 䊊
A blinks (after 20 want to program and the hand-held trans-
seconds). Release both buttons. mitter button.
2. Position the end of the hand-held trans-
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
mitter 1 to 3 in (20 to 70 mm) away from
been completed.
the HomeLink姞 surface.

2-52 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
4. Hold down both buttons until the indica- NOTE: PROGRAMMING HOMELINK姞 FOR
tor light on HomeLink姞 flashes, changing CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
Once you have pushed and released the training
from a “slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. button on the garage door opener’s motor and
This could take up to 90 seconds. When Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-
the “training light” is lit, you have 30 seconds in held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2
the indicator light blinks rapidly, both which to perform step 7. For convenience, use
buttons may be released. The rapidly seconds. To program your hand-held transmit-
the help of a second person to assist when per- ter to HomeLink姞, continue to push and hold
flashing light indicates successful pro- forming this step.
gramming. To activate the garage door or the HomeLink姞 button (note steps 2 through 4
7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing under “Programming HomeLink姞”) while you
other programmed device, push and hold and releasing the garage door opener push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held
the programmed HomeLink姞 button - re- program button) and firmly push and re- transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator
leasing when the device begins to acti- lease the HomeLink姞 button you’ve just light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro-
vate. programmed. Push and release the gramming).
5. If the indicator light on HomeLink姞 blinks HomeLink姞 button up to three times to
rapidly for two seconds and then turns complete the training. NOTE:
solid, HomeLink姞 has picked up a “rolling 8. Your HomeLink姞 button should now be If programming a garage door opener, etc., it is
code” garage door opener signal. You will programmed. advised to unplug the device during the “cy-
need to proceed with the next steps to cling” process to prevent possible damage to
To program the remaining HomeLink姞 buttons
train HomeLink姞, completing the pro- the garage door opener components.
for additional door or gate openers, follow
gramming may require a ladder and an- steps 2 through 8 only.
other person for convenience. OPERATING THE HOMELINK姞
6. Push and release the program button NOTE: UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
located on the garage door opener’s mo- Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to “clear” HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver (once pro-
tor to activate the “training mode”. This all previously programmed HomeLink姞 buttons. grammed) may now be used to activate the
button is usually located near the an- garage door, etc. To operate, simply push the
tenna wire that hangs down from the If you have any questions or are having diffi- appropriate programmed HomeLink姞 Universal
motor. If the wire originates from under a culty programming your HomeLink姞 buttons, Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
light lens, you will need to remove the please refer to the HomeLink姞 web site at: illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
lens to access the program button. www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

Instruments and controls 2-53

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED button that was just programmed. This proce-
INFORMATION dure will not affect any other programmed
If HomeLink姞 does not quickly learn the hand- HomeLink姞 buttons.
held transmitter information: Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however
● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries to clear all programming, push and hold the two
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
with new batteries. outside buttons and release when the indicator If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
● position the hand-held transmitter with its light begins to flash (in approximately 20 sec- codes of any non-rolling code device that has
battery area facing away from the onds). been programmed into HomeLink姞. Consult the
HomeLink姞 surface. Owner’s Manual of each device or call the
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE manufacturer or dealer of those devices for
● push and hold both the HomeLink姞 and HOMELINK姞 BUTTON additional information.
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ruption. To reprogram a HomeLink姞 Universal Trans- When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to
ceiver button, complete the following. reprogram the HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver
● position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in with your new transmitter information.
(50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink姞 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink姞
surface. Hold the transmitter in that position button. Do not release the button until FCC Notice:
for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink姞 is not step 4 has been completed.
This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Op-
programmed within that time, try holding 2. When the indicator light begins to flash
eration is subject to the following two condi-
the transmitter in another position - keeping slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
tions: (1) This device may not cause harmful in-
the indicator light in view at all times. hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127
terference and (2) This device must accept any
mm) away from the HomeLink姞 surface.
If you continue to have programming difficul- interference that may be received, including in-
ties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer Af- 3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter terference that may cause undesired operation.
fairs Department. The phone numbers are lo- button.
The transmitter has been tested and complies
cated in the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual. 4. The HomeLink姞 indicator light will flash, with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modi-
first slowly and then rapidly. When the fications not expressly approved by the party
indicator light begins to flash rapidly, responsible for compliance could void the user’s
release both buttons. authority to operate the device.
The HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver button DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
has now been reprogrammed. The new device
can be activated by pushing the HomeLink姞 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690
2-54 Instruments and controls

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17


Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Trunk lid release switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Valet hand-off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Trunk open request switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Opening with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Locking with mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Trunk open button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Opening and closing windows with the Trunk release power cancel switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Locking with power door lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Tilt or telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Intelligent Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Intelligent Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Inside mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Battery saver system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
How to use remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . 3-14 Memory storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
KEYS

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. all memory in the Intelligent Key components
Record the key number and keep it in a safe when registering new keys, be sure to take all
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If Intelligent Keys that you have to the INFINITI
you lose your keys, see an INFINITI dealer for dealer.
duplicates by using the key number. INFINITI
does not record any key numbers so it is very CAUTION
important to keep track of your key number
plate. ● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
when driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-
A key number is only necessary when you have sion device with a built-in transmitter. To
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate avoid damaging it, please note the
from. If you still have a key, this key can be following.
duplicated by an INFINITI dealer.
SPA2505
– The Intelligent Key is water resistant;
however, wetting may damage the Intelli-
1. Intelligent Key (2) gent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is completely
2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Keys) dry.
(2)
– Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-
3. Key number plate (1) other object.
INTELLIGENT KEY – Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelli- extended period in a place where tem-
gent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
Intelligent Key system components and INFINITI – Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As Key.
many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. The new keys must – Do not use a magnet key holder.
be registered by an INFINITI dealer prior to use – Do not place the Intelligent Key near an
with the Intelligent Key system and INFINITI electric appliance such as a television
Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. set, personal computer or cellular phone.
Since the registration process requires erasing
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
– Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come CAUTION
into contact with water or salt water, and
Always carry the mechanical key installed in
do not wash it in a washing machine. This
the Intelligent Key.
could affect the system function.
● If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI
recommends erasing the ID code of that In- VALET HAND-OFF
telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelli- When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
gent Key from unauthorized use to unlock them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the
the vehicle. For information regarding the mechanical key with you to protect your belong-
erasing procedure, please contact an ings.
INFINITI dealer.
To prevent the glove box and the trunk from
SPA2033 being opened during valet hand-off, follow the
Mechanical key procedures below.
1. Push the trunk release power cancel
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock switch to the CANCEL side.
knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.
2. Remove the mechanical key from the In-
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it telligent Key.
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob 3. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass-
returns to the lock position. through with the mechanical key.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the 4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,
doors, trunk lid, glove box and trunk pass- keeping the mechanical key in your
through lid, if they are equipped with a key pocket or bag for insertion into the Intel-
cylinder. ligent Key when you retrieve your vehicle.
See “DOORS” later in this section and “TRUNK See “TRUNK LID” later in this section, “STOR-
LID” later in this section, “STORAGE” in the “2. AGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
Instruments and controls” section and “SEATS” tion and “SEATS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple- belts and supplemental restraint system” sec-
mental restraint system” section. tion.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
DOORS

● You can switch the lock system to the mode


WARNING
that allows you to open all the doors when
● Always have the doors locked while driving. the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE
Along with the use of seat belts, this pro- SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, cli-
vides greater safety in the event of an acci- mate, audio, phone and voice recognition
dent by helping to prevent persons from be- systems” section.)
ing thrown from the vehicle. This also helps
keep children and others from unintention- OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS
ally opening the doors, and will help keep WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY
out intruders.
The driver’s door key operation also allows you
● Before opening any door, always look for and to open and close all door windows.
avoid oncoming traffic.
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door key
● Do not leave children unattended inside the SPA2117
cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer than
vehicle. They could unknowingly activate LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY 1 second . The door is unlocked and the window
switches or controls. Unattended children keeps opening while turning the key.
could become involved in serious accidents. The power door lock system allows you to lock
or unlock all doors simultaneously using the This function can also be performed by pushing
mechanical key. and holding the door UNLOCK button of the
● Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the Intelligent Key. (See “HOW TO USE REMOTE
front of the vehicle 䊊1 will lock all doors. KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION” later in this sec-
tion.)
● Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once
to the rear of the vehicle 䊊2 will unlock the To close the windows, turn the driver’s door key
driver’s door. After returning the key to the cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer
neutral position 䊊 3 , turning it to the rear than 1 second . The door is locked and the
again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors. window keeps closing while turning the key.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver or front
passenger) is moved to the lock position with
the Intelligent Key in the port and any door
open, all doors will lock and unlock automati-
cally. With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle
(not in the Intelligent Key port) and any door
open, all doors will unlock automatically and a
chime will sound after the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent
Key from being accidentally locked inside the
SPA2000 SPA2300 vehicle.
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
To lock the door individually, move the inside SWITCH ● All doors will be locked automatically when
lock knob to the lock position 䊊
1 then close the
Operating the power door lock switch will lock
the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
door. or unlock all the doors. The switches are lo- ● All doors will be unlocked automatically
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the cated on the driver’s and front passenger’s door when the ignition switch is pushed to the
unlock position 䊊
2 . armrests. OFF position.
When locking the door without an Intelligent To lock the doors, push the power door lock The automatic lock and unlock functions can be
Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key switch to the lock position 䊊
1 with the driver’s deactivated or activated independently of each
inside the vehicle. or front passenger’s door open, then close the other.
door.
To deactivate or activate the automatic lock or
When locking the door this way, be certain not to unlock system, perform the following proce-
leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle. dure:
To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler 1. Close all doors.
door, push the power door lock switch to the 2. Push the ignition switch to the “ON”
unlock position 䊊
2 . position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds WARNING


of performing step 2:
● Radio waves could adversely affect electric
● To change AUTO UNLOCK settings: push medical equipment. Those who use a pace-
and hold the power door lock switch to maker should contact the electric medical
the position (UNLOCK) for more equipment manufacturer for the possible in-
than 5 seconds. fluences before use.
● To change AUTO LOCK settings: push and ● The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves
hold the power door lock switch to the when the buttons are pushed. The FAA ad-
position (LOCK) for more than 5 vises that the radio waves may affect aircraft
seconds. navigation and communication systems. Do
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will not operate the Intelligent Key while on an
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard SPA2423 airplane. Make sure the buttons are not op-
erated unintentionally when the unit is
indicator will flash once. CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK stored during a flight.
5. The ignition must be placed in the OFF and The child safety rear door lock helps prevent
ON position again between each setting doors from being opened accidentally, espe-
change. The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
cially when small children are in the vehicle. door locks using the remote controller function
When the levers are in the lock position 䊊
1 , the or pushing the request switch on the vehicle
rear doors can be opened only from the outside. without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or con-
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock ditions may affect the Intelligent Key system
position 䊊
2 .
operation.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Be sure to read the following before using the ● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
Intelligent Key system. electric appliance such as a personal com- and used with one vehicle. For information
puter. about the purchase and use of additional Intel-
CAUTION ● When the vehicle is parked near a parking ligent Keys, contact an INFINITI dealer.
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you meter.
when operating the vehicle. CAUTION
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle ● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which con-
before using the Intelligent Key function or use tains electrical components, to come into
when you leave the vehicle. the mechanical key. contact with water or salt water. This could
Although the life of the battery varies depend- affect the system function.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating ing on the operating conditions, the battery’s ● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is
Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio discharged, replace it with a new one. ● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
waves. Environmental conditions may interfere against another object.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-
with the operation of the Intelligent Key system ● Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
under the following operating conditions. ing radio waves, if the key is left near equip-
ment which transmits strong radio waves, such ● Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If
● When operating near a location where strong as signals from a TV and personal computer, the the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately
radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV battery life may become shorter. wipe until it is completely dry.
tower, power station and broadcasting sta-
For information regarding replacement of a bat- ● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-
tion. tended period in an area where tempera-
tery, see “BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8.
● When in possession of wireless equipment, Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
tures exceed 140°F (60°C).
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, ● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key
and CB radio. Because the steering wheel is locked electri- holder that contains a magnet.
cally, unlocking the steering wheel with the
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or ● Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-
ignition switch in the LOCK position is impos-
covered by metallic materials. ment that produces a magnetic field, such as
sible when the vehicle battery is completely
● When any type of radio wave remote control discharged. Pay special attention that the ve- a TV, audio equipment, personal computers
is used nearby. hicle battery is not completely discharged. or cellular phones.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING RANGE
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to oper- when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
ate the vehicle. For information regarding the operating range from the request switch.
erasing procedure, contact an INFINITI dealer. When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged
or strong radio waves are present near the
operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s
operating range becomes narrower, and the
Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
from each request switch.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone who does not
carry the Intelligent Key to push the request
switch to lock/unlock the doors.

SPA2341A

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the trunk, make sure you carry the key
with you and then close the trunk.
● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
● The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing
doors with the door handle request switch)
can be set to remain inactive. (See “VEHICLE
INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in the “4.
SPA2326 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice SPA2424
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION recognition systems” section.) INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
● Do not push the door handle request switch You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as the key out from your pocket or bag.
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intel-
ligent Key is outside the vehicle.
● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
key with you and then lock the doors.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
3. Push the driver’s or front passenger’s 4. The hazard indicator flashes once and
door handle request switch while carrying outside chime sounds once again. All the
the Intelligent Key with you.*3 doors will unlock.
4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will lock. All doors will be locked automatically unless
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the one of the following operations is performed
outside chime sounds twice. within 1 minute after pushing the request switch
while the doors are locked.
*1: Doors will lock with door handle request
● Opening any doors.
switch while the ignition switch is in the ACC
or ON position. ● Pushing the ignition switch.

*2: Doors will not lock with the door handle ● Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-
request switch while any door is open. gent Key port.
SPA2425
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you *3: Doors will not lock with the door handle
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door request switch when the Intelligent Key is
handle request switch 䊊 A within the range of left inside the vehicle.
operation. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
When you lock or unlock the doors or the trunk other registered Intelligent Key.
lid, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn
(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma- Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door
tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator 1. Push the driver’s or front passenger’s
and horn mode” later in this section. door handle request switch once while
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
Locking doors and fuel-filler door
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) outside chime sounds once. The corre-
position, push the ignition switch to the sponding door and the fuel-filler door will
LOCK position and make sure you carry unlock.
the Intelligent Key with you.*1 3. Push the door handle request switch
2. Close all the doors.*2 again within 1 minute.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Opening trunk lid WARNING SIGNALS
1. Push the trunk open request switch 䊊A for To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
more than 1 second. pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelli-
2. The trunk will unlatch. An outside chime gent Key listed on the following chart or to help
will sound four times. prevent the vehicle from being stolen, chime or
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk. beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and
a warning displays in the dot matrix liquid
Lockout protection crystal display.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci- When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection displays, be sure to check the vehicle and
is equipped with the Intelligent Key system. Intelligent Key.
SPA2426 When the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent
Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in this
sound and the trunk will open. section and “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DIS-
PLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM section.
When all the following conditions are met for 60
minutes, the battery saver system will cut off
the power supply to prevent battery discharge.
● The ignition switch is in the ACC position,
and
● All doors are closed, and
● The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

SPA2427

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible cause Action to take
The SHIFT P warning appears on the
When pushing the ignition switch to The selector lever is not in the P Shift the selector lever to the P
display and the inside warning chime
stop the engine (Park) position. (Park) position.
sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC Push the ignition switch to the LOCK
When opening the driver’s door to The inside warning chime sounds position. position.
get out of the vehicle continuously. The Intelligent Key is in the Intelli- Remove the Intelligent Key from the
gent Key port. Intelligent Key port.
The NO KEY warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds 3 The ignition switch is in the ACC or Push the ignition switch to the LOCK
times and the inside warning chime ON position. position.
When closing the door after getting sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
out of the vehicle
The SHIFT P warning appears on the The ignition switch is in the ACC po- Move the selector lever to the P
display and the outside chime sition and the selector lever is not in (Park) position and push the ignition
sounds continuously. the P (Park) position. switch to the LOCK position.
When closing the door with the in- The outside chime sounds for ap- The Intelligent Key is inside the ve- Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
side lock knob turned to LOCK proximately 3 seconds and all the hicle or trunk.
doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the ve-
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
hicle or trunk.
When pushing the door handle re- The outside chime sounds for ap-
A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
quest switch to lock the door proximately 2 seconds.
The door handle request switch is Push the door handle request switch
pushed before the door is closed. after the door is closed.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Symptom Possible cause Action to take
When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for ap- The Intelligent Key is inside the Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
proximately 10 seconds and the trunk.
trunk lid opens.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY 5. All the doors and fuel-filler door will lock.
FUNCTION 6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and
the horn chirps once.
The remote keyless entry function can operate
all door locks and open the trunk lid using the *1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while
remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
The remote keyless function can operate at a position.
distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the
vehicle. (The operating distance depends upon *2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key
the conditions around the vehicle.) while any door is open.
The remote keyless function will not operate Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door
when:
SPA2100
1. Push the UNLOCK button 䊊
2 on the
● the distance between the Intelligent Key and Intelligent Key.
the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m). When you lock or unlock the doors or the trunk
lid, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn 2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The
● the Intelligent Key battery is discharged. driver’s door and fuel-filler door will un-
(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma-
The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies de- tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator lock.
pending on the environment. To securely oper- and horn mode” later in this section. 3. Push the UNLOCK button again
ate the lock and unlock buttons, approach the within 1 minute.
vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door. Locking doors and fuel-filler door
4. The hazard indicator flashes once. All the
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
doors will unlock.
position and push the ignition switch to
the LOCK position. All doors will be locked automatically unless
2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1 one of the following operations is performed
within 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK
3. Close all the doors.*2
button while the doors are locked.
4. Push the LOCK button 䊊
1 on the
● Opening any doors.
Intelligent Key.
● Pushing the ignition switch.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelli- Using panic alarm In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
gent Key port. button is pushed, the hazard indicator
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK you may activate the alarm to call attention as flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button
is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the
button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, follows:
horn operates.
all doors will be locked automatically after
1. Push the PANIC button 䊊4 on the
another 1 minute.
Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.
Opening windows 2. The theft warning alarm and headlights
To open the windows, push the door UNLOCK will stay on for 25 seconds.
button on the Intelligent Key for about 3 3. The panic alarm stops when:
seconds after the door is unlocked. ● It has run for 25 seconds, or
To stop opening, release the UNLOCK ● Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key
button. is pushed. (Note: the TRUNK or PANIC
button must be pushed for more than 1
Windows cannot be closed using the Intelligent second.)
Key.
Setting hazard indicator and horn
The windows can be opened or closed by
turning the mechanical key in a door lock. (See mode
“DOORS” earlier in this section.) This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
mode when you first receive the vehicle.
Opening trunk lid
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
1. Push the TRUNK button 䊊 3 on the
LOCK button 䊊
1 is pushed, the hazard
Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps
2. The trunk will unlatch. once. When the UNLOCK button 䊊2 is
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk. pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.
If horns are not necessary, the system can be
switched to the hazard indicator mode.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
Hazard indicator and horn mode Switching procedure
To switch the hazard indicator and horn opera-
Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK OPEN tion, push the LOCK 䊊 1 and UNLOCK

Push door handle request HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once HAZARD - none 䊊2 buttons on the Intelligent Key simul-

OUTSIDE CHIME - OUTSIDE CHIME - taneously for more than 2 seconds.


switch or trunk open re- OUTSIDE CHIME - 4
quest switch twice once times ● When the hazard indicator mode is set, the
hazard indicator flashes 3 times.
Push , or HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once HAZARD - none
HORN - once HORN - none ● When the hazard indicator and horn mode is
button HORN - none
set, the hazard indicator flashes once and
the horn chirps once.
Hazard indicator mode

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK OPEN


Push door handle request HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none
switch or trunk open re-
quest switch

Push , or HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none


button

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
HOOD TRUNK LID

WARNING
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle. See “EXHAUST GAS
(carbon monoxide)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
● Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where they
could be seriously injured. Keep the car
locked, with the trunk closed, when not in
use, and prevent children’s access to Intelli-
gent Keys.
SPA2446

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊 1 WARNING


located below the instrument panel; the
● Make sure the hood is completely closed and
hood will then spring up slightly.
latched before driving. Failure to do so could
2. Pull the lever 䊊
2 at the front of the hood cause the hood to fly open and result in an
with your fingertips and raise the hood. accident.
3. When closing the hood, slowly close the ● If you see steam or smoke coming from the
hood down to latch both the right and left engine compartment, to avoid injury do not
locks. Push the hood down to lock the open the hood.
hood securely into place.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SPA2120A SPA2427 SPA2428
TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH TRUNK OPEN REQUEST SWITCH OPENING WITH KEY
The trunk lid release switch 䊊
A is located on the The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the To open the trunk lid, insert the mechanical key
instrument panel. trunk open request switch 䊊A when the Intelli- to the trunk key cylinder and turn the key to the
gent Key is within the operating range of the right side of the vehicle. To close, remove the
To open the trunk lid, push the release switch
trunk lock/unlock function regardless of the key and push the trunk lid down.
down as illustrated. To close, push the trunk lid
inside lock knob position. (See “INTELLIGENT
down.
KEY SYSTEM” earlier in this section.) TRUNK OPEN BUTTON
You can open the trunk lid with Intelligent Key. The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the
(See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” page 3-6.) TRUNK OPEN button on the Intelligent
Key for more than 1 second.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
See “KEYS” earlier in this section.
To connect the power to the trunk lid, push the
switch to the ON 䊊
2 position.

SPA2429 SPA2552
TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
SWITCH
WARNING
When the switch located inside the glove box is
in the CANCEL position 䊊 1 , the power to the Closely supervise children when they are
trunk lid will be canceled and the trunk lid around cars to prevent them from playing and
cannot be opened by the trunk lid release becoming locked in the trunk where they could
switch, the trunk open request switch with the be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with
Intelligent Key carried with you or the TRUNK the trunk lid securely latched, when not in use,
button on the Intelligent Key. and prevent children’s access to Intelligent
Keys.
When you have to leave the vehicle with a valet
and want to keep your belongings safe in the
glove box and the trunk, push this switch to The interior trunk lid release mechanism allows
CANCEL and lock the glove box with the me- opening of the trunk lid in the event that people
chanical key. Then leave the vehicle and the become locked inside the trunk or in the event
Intelligent Key with the valet and keep the of the loss of electrical power such as a dis-
mechanical key with you. charged battery.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Releasing inside the trunk To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and
lock all doors by operating the door handle
To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the
request switch, the LOCK button on the
release handle 䊊A until the lock releases and
Intelligent Key, the mechanical key or the power
push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is
door lock switch.
made of a material that glows in the dark after
a brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located on the back of the trunk
lid as illustrated.
Releasing from the rear seat
You can also access the release handle through
the trunk pass-through (rear seat armrest). (See SPA2017
“ARMREST” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
and supplemental restraint system” section.)
To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-filler
To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, pull the
door by using one of the following operations,
release handle towards front of vehicle until the
then push the left side of the door.
lock releases.
● Push the door handle request switch with
the Intelligent Key carried with you.
● Push the UNLOCK button on the Intel-
ligent Key.
● Insert the mechanical key into the door lock
cylinder and turn it to the rear of the vehicle.
● Push the power door lock switch to the
UNLOCK position.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after – Use only approved portable fuel contain-
the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automati- ers for flammable liquid.
cally. Continued refueling may cause fuel
overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possi-
bly a fire. CAUTION
● Use only an original equipment type fuel- ● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it
filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in away with water to avoid paint damage.
safety valve needed for proper operation of
the fuel system and emission control sys- ● Insert the cap straight into the fuel-filler
tem. An incorrect cap can result in a serious tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap
malfunction and possible injury. It could clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
also cause the malfunction indicator light to properly may cause the malfunction
SPA1428B come on. indicator light (MIL) to illuminate. If the
FUEL-FILLER CAP ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to at-
light illuminates because the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or in-
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the tempt to start your vehicle.
stall the cap and continue to drive the ve-
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, ● Do not fill a portable fuel container in the hicle. The light should turn off after a
turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause
are heard. an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or few driving trips. If the light does not
gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the turn off after a few driving trips, have the
WARNING risk of serious injury or death when filling vehicle inspected by an INFINITI dealer.
portable fuel containers: For additional information, see “Malfunction
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly
explosive under certain conditions. You – Always place the container on the ground Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “2. Instruments
could be burned or seriously injured if it is when filling. and controls” section.
misused or mishandled. Always stop engine
– Do not use electronic devices when filling.
and do not smoke or allow open flames or Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
A
sparks near the vehicle when refueling. – Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the while refueling.
container while you are filling it.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING SUN VISORS

WARNING
● Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
● Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer
to you than is necessary for proper steering
operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag
inflates with great force. If you are unre-
strained, leaning forward, sitting sideways
or out of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You
may also receive serious or fatal injuries SPA2018
from the air bag if you are up against it when
it inflates. Always sit back against the seat-
TILT OR TELESCOPIC OPERATION
back and as far away as practical from the Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up
steering wheel. Always use the seat belts. or down, forward or rearward to the desired
position.
Entry/Exit function operation
The automatic drive positioner system will
make the steering wheel move up automatically
when the driver’s door is opened with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position. This lets
the driver get into and out of the seat more
easily.
For more information, see “AUTOMATIC DRIVE
POSITIONER” later in this section.
SPA2057

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
MIRRORS

CAUTION
● Do not store the main sun visor before stor-
ing the sub-sun visor and the extension sun
visor.
● Do not pull the sub-sun visor and the exten-
sion sun visor forcedly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing


down the main sun visor 䊊 1 .
2. To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing it to the side 䊊2 . SPA2447 SPA2422A

3. To block glare from the front, swing down INSIDE MIRROR Type A
the sub-sun visor 䊊 3 .
Adjust the height and the angle of the inside
4. Draw out the extension sun visor 䊊 4 from
mirror to the desired position.
the main sun visor to block from further
glare.

SPA2450
Type B

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Automatic anti-glare type Do not allow any object to cover the sensors 䊊 E
or apply glass cleaner on them. Doing so will
The inside mirror is designed so that it auto- reduce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in
matically changes reflection according to the improper operation.
intensity of the headlights of the following
vehicle. For the compass (if so equipped) operation, see
“COMPASS” in the “2. Instruments and con-
The anti-glare system will be automatically trols” section.
turned on when the ignition switch is pushed to
the ON position. For the HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver opera-
tion, see “HomeLink姞 UNIVERSAL TRANS-
When the anti-glare system is turned on, the CEIVER” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
indicator light 䊊
A will illuminate and excessive section.
glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind
you will be reduced. SPA2214
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
Type A: Push the switch 䊊
B to make the
inside rearview mirror operate normally and the
indicator light will turn off. Push the WARNING
switch again to turn the system on. Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the
passenger side are closer than they appear. Be
Type B: Push the “䡩” switch 䊊 C to make the
careful when moving to the right. Using only
inside rearview mirror operate normally. The this mirror could cause an accident. Use the
indicator light will turn off. Push the “I” switch inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to
䊊D to turn the system on.
properly judge distances to other objects.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Adjusting outside mirrors 4. The selected outside mirror surface
moves downward.
The outside mirror control switch is located at
the lower part of the instrument panel. When one of the following conditions has oc-
curred, the selected outside mirror surface will
The outside mirror will operate only when the return to its original position.
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
● The selector lever is moved to any position
Move the switch right 䊊 1 or left 䊊
2 to select the other than R (Reverse).
right or left side mirror, then adjust 䊊3 using
the control switch. ● The outside mirror control switch is set to
the center position.
Defrosting outside mirrors (if so ● The ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK
equipped) position.
SPA1829
The outside mirrors will be heated when the For more information regarding this feature and
rear window defroster switch is operated. (See Foldable outside mirrors how to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-down
“REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DE- Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the adjustment in the automatic drive positioner
FROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and rear of the vehicle. memory, see “Automatic drive positioner” later
controls” section.) in this section.
Reverse tilt-down feature
When backing up the vehicle, the right or left
outside mirror will turn downward automatically
to provide better rear visibility.
1. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Move the selector lever to the R (Reverse)
position.
3. Choose the right or left outside mirror by
operating the outside mirror control
switch.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

The automatic drive positioner system has the The driver’s seat will not return to the previous Initialize entry/exit function
following features: positions if the seat or steering adjusting
switch is operated when the seat is at the exit If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
● Entry/exit function fuse opens, the entry/exit function will not work
position.
● Memory storage though this function was set on before. In such
Cancel or activate entry/exit function a case, after connecting the battery or replacing
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION To cancel or activate the entry/exit function, the
with a new fuse, open and close the driver’s
door more than two times after the ignition
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat selector lever must be in the P (Park) position
switch is pushed to the ON position once, then
and steering column will automatically move with the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
pushed to the LOCK position. The entry/exit
when the selector lever is in the P (Park) Push and hold the SET switch for more than 10 function will be activated.
position. This allows the driver to get into and seconds to cancel or activate the entry/exit
out of the driver’s seat more easily. function.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and the The indicator lights on the memory switches (1
steering wheel will move up when the driver’s and 2) will blink once when the function is
door is opened with the ignition switch in the canceled, and the indicator lights will blink
LOCK position. twice when the function is activated.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return The entry/exit function can also be canceled or
to the previous positions when one of the activated if the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit” key
following is operated: or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key is turned
to ON or OFF in the “Comfort & Conv.” settings.
● When the ignition switch is pushed to the (See “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in
ACC position after the driver’s door is the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
closed. voice recognition systems” section.)
● When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position.
● When the Intelligent Key is inserted into the
port after the driver’s door is closed.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column Procedure for storing the outside
and outside mirrors to the desired posi- mirror positions for best visibility at
tions by manually operating each adjust-
ing switch. For additional information, see reverse tilt-down feature
“SEATS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat Two outside mirror positions for backing up can
belts and supplemental restraint system” be stored in the automatic drive positioner
section and “TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING” memory.
page 3-22 and “OUTSIDE MIRRORS” ear-
1. Apply the parking brake.
lier in this section.
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-
tion. (Do not start the engine.)
onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)
fully for at least 1 second. 3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for
at least 1 second to operate the automatic
SPA2020 The indicator light for the pushed memory drive positioner.
MEMORY STORAGE switch will stay on for approximately 5 sec-
4. Turn the outside mirror control switch to L
onds after pushing the switch.
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering (left).
column and outside mirrors can be stored in the If memory is stored in the same memory switch, 5. Depress the brake pedal.
automatic drive positioner memory. Follow the previous memory will be deleted.
6. Move the selector lever to the R (Reverse)
these procedures to use the memory system. position.
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) 7. Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing
position. position for backing up by operating the
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi- outside mirror control switch.
tion.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
8. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec- Linking Intelligent Key to a stored this case, reset the desired position using
onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2) memory position the previous procedure.
selected in step 3 fully for at least 1 ● If optional Intelligent Keys are added to your
second. The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored vehicle, perform the memory storage proce-
● The indicator light for the pushed memory memory position with the following procedure. dure to switch (1 or 2) and linking Intelligent
switch will stay on for approximately 5 1. Follow the steps for storing a memory Key procedure to a stored memory position
seconds after pushing the switch. After position. again for each Intelligent Key. For additional
the indicator light goes off, the selected Intelligent Key information, see “KEYS” ear-
2. While the indicator light for the memory
mirror position is stored in the selected lier in this section.
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-
memory (1 or 2).
onds, push the button on the Intel- Selecting the memorized position
9. Turn the outside mirror control switch to R ligent Key. If the indicator light blinks, the
(right). 1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
Intelligent Key is linked to that memory position.
Repeat the above procedure to adjust the setting.
2. Use one of the following methods to move
right mirror position and store in the se- Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position, the driver’s seat, steering column and
lected memory. outside mirrors.
and push the button on the Intelligent
● When the driver’s seat, outside mirror and Key. The driver’s seat, steering wheel and out- ● Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
steering column are not in the memorized side mirrors will move to the memorized posi- tion and push the memory switch (1 or 2)
position, the outside mirror will move tion. fully for at least 1 second.
with the initial tilt-down angle, if the
reverse tilt-down position is stored. Confirming memory storage ● Within 45 seconds after opening the driv-
● Push the ignition switch to the ON position er’s door, push the memory switch (1 or 2)
and push the SET switch. If the main memory fully for at least 1 second.
has not been stored, the indicator light will The driver’s seat, steering column and
come on for approximately 0.5 second. outside mirrors will move to the memo-
When the memory has stored in position, the rized position with the indicator light
indicator light will stay on for approximately flashing, and then the light will stay on for
5 seconds. approximately 5 seconds.
● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will not
work or will stop operating under the following
conditions:
● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
km/h).
● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat and steering column is turned on while
the automatic drive positioner is operating.
● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is not
pushed for at least 1 second.
● When the seat, steering column and outside
mirrors have already been moved to the
memorized position.
● When no position is stored in the memory
switch.
● When the engine is started while the auto-
matic drive positioner is operating.
● When approximately 45 seconds have
passed after the driver’s door was opened
(ignition switch is not in the ON position).
● When the selector lever is moved from the P
(Park) position to any other position. (How-
ever, it will not be canceled if the switch is
pushed while the seat and steering column
are returning to the previous positions
(entry/exit function).)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
MEMO

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems

Safety note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 How to use SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15


Center multi-function control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 How to use AUX button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
How to use INFINITI controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 How to use DISC button
How to use touch screen (for models without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . 4-22
(models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Rearview monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Start-up screen How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
(models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . . . . 4-23
Start menu
Difference between predicted and actual
(models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to adjust the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Vehicle information and settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
How to use STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use brightness control and display Ventilators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
ON/OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
How to use DISP button Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
(models without navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Rear switches for climate control
How to use TRIP button (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
(models without navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
How to use FUEL ECON button In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
(models without navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Servicing climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
How to use INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Warning display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System with
player/changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
CompactFlash (CF) player operation Regulatory information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
iPod姞 player operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Music box hard-disk drive audio system Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
(models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Phonebook registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
CD/CF (CompactFlash) care and cleaning . . . . . . . . 4-56
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio . . . . . . 4-57
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Rear control switches for audio
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Auxiliary input jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
INFINITI Mobile Entertainment System (MES) Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System without
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) system Regulatory information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Before operating the DVD mobile Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
entertainment system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Playing a DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Choosing a language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Making a call by entering a phone number . . . . . . 4-88 INFINITI Voice Recognition system
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 (models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 INFINITI Voice Recognition standard mode . . . . . . . 4-99
Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
During A Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 INFINITI Voice Recognition alternate
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Memo pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
SAFETY NOTE CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL

WARNING
● Do not disassemble or modify this system. If
you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or
electric shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack
of sound. Continued use of the system may
result in accident, fire or electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in the
system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice
smoke or smell coming from it, stop using
the system immediately and contact your
nearest INFINITI dealer. Ignoring such condi- SAA1800
tions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric
shock. With navigation system
● Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply 1. “STATUS ” status display button (P. 4-7) 11. “SETTING ” button (P. 4-15)
the parking brake to view the images on the 12. “AM·FM·SAT ” band selector button
front center display screen using devices 2, 6, 7, 8, 9. Navigation system control
buttons (Refer to the separate (P. 4-34)
connected to the auxiliary input jacks.
Navigation System Owner’s 13. “DISC·AUX ” selector button (P. 4-21)
Manual.)
Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme 3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-4)
temperature conditions [below ⫺4°F (⫺20°C)
and above 158°F (70°C)]. Operating this system 4. “PHONE ” Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone
under these conditions may result in system System button (P. 4-73)
malfunctions. 5. “ OFF ” brightness control and dis-
play ON/OFF button (P. 4-7)
10. “INFO ” vehicle and navigation informa-
tion button (P. 4-8)
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
SAA1097
Without navigation system SAA1801
With navigation system

1. “DISP ” display setting button (P. 4-8, 9. “DISC ” selector button (P. 4-22)
P. 4-16) 10. “INFO ” vehicle information button
2. “RADIO AM·FM ” band selector button (P. 4-8)
(P. 4-34) 11. “SETTING ” button (P. 4-15)
3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-4) When you use this system, make sure the
4. “STATUS ” status display button (P. 4-7) engine is running.
5. “ OFF ” brightness control and dis- If you use the system with the engine not run-
play ON/OFF button (P. 4-7) ning (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will
use up all the battery power, and the engine will
6. “TRIP ” trip computer button (P. 4-8, not start.
P. 4-10)
7. “FUEL ECON ” button (P. 4-8, P. 4-9) SAA1098
8. “AUX ” button (P. 4-21) Without navigation system

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER ● To clean the display, never use a rough cloth,
Choose an item on the display using the main alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of sol-
vent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning
directional buttons 䊊
2 (or additional directional
agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the
buttons 䊊 6 with navigation system) or center
panel.
dial 䊊3 , and push the ENTER button 䊊 1 for
operation. ● Do not splash any liquid such as water or car
fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid
If you push the BACK button 䊊 4 before the
will cause the system to malfunction.
setup is completed, the setup will be canceled
and/or the display will return to the previous
screen. This button can also be used to delete To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot
characters that have been input. be operated while driving.
SAA1802
After the setup is completed, push the BACK The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted. Touch screen operation
button 䊊4 and return to the previous screen.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then With this system, the same operations as those
For the VOICE button 䊊5 functions, refer to the
operate the navigation system. for the INFINITI controller are possible using the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. touch screen operation.
HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models Selecting the item :
with navigation system) Touch an item to select. To select the “Audio”
settings, touch the “Audio” area 䊊 1 on the
CAUTION screen.
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal display Touch the BACK 䊊
2 button to return the previ-
may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp ous screen.
object. If the glass breaks, do not touch the
liquid crystalline material, which contains a
small amount of mercury. In case of contact
with skin, wash immediately with soap and
water.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
● Delete:
Deletes the last character that has been
input with one touch. Push and hold the
button to delete all of the characters.
● OK:
Completes character inputs.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
SAA1543 SAA1617 cloth. Never spray the screen with water or
Adjusting an item : Inputting characters : detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then
wipe the screen.
Touch the + 䊊
1 or ⫺ 䊊
2 button to adjust the Touch the letter or number 䊊
1 .
settings.
There are some options available when input-
Touch the UP 䊊3 or DOWN 䊊 4 button to move to ting characters.
the previous or next page.
● Uppercase:
Shows uppercase characters.
● Lowercase:
Shows lowercase characters.
● Space:
Inserts a space.
● Symbols:
Shows symbols such as the question mark
(?).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
SAA1454 SAA1471 SAA1591
START-UP SCREEN (models with START MENU (models with navigation Available items
navigation system) system) Destination/Route :
When you push the ignition switch to the ACC or The start menu can be displayed using the
These items are for the navigation system. If
ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is ENTER switch on the steering-wheel-mounted
your vehicle is equipped with the navigation
displayed on the screen. When you read and controls.
agree with the warning, push the ENTER button. system, see the separate Navigation System
1. While the map (if so equipped) or status Owner’s Manual for details.
If you do not push the ENTER button, you will screen is displayed, push and hold the
not be able to use the NAVI system. ENTER switch until the “Menu Options” Information :
screen appears. Displays the information screen. It is the same
To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. 2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting the screen that appears when you push the INFO
ENTER switch up or down, and then push button.
the ENTER switch to select.
Settings :
Displays the settings screen. It is the same
screen that appears when you push the SET-
TING button.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator: HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON


Shows that the INFINITI controller may be To display the status of the audio, climate
used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and control system, fuel consumption and naviga-
select more options. tion system (if so equipped), push the STATUS
4. Screen Count: button. The following information will appear
when the STATUS button is pushed.
Shows the number of menu selections avail-
able for that screen (i.e. 1/9). Audio → Audio and Climate control system →
5. Footer/Information Line: Audio and fuel consumption → Audio and Navi-
gation system (if so equipped) → Audio
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently high- HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
SAA1510 lighted. (i.e. Cabin lighting when un- AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
locking doors.)
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE Push the “ OFF ” button to switch the
SCREEN display brightness to the daytime mode or the
nighttime mode, and to adjust the display
Vehicle functions are viewed on the display brightness using the INFINITI controller while
screen in menus. Whenever a menu selection is the indicator is displayed at the bottom of the
made or menu item is highlighted, different screen.
areas on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details. The display brightness can also be adjusted
using the brightness UP button (+) or bright-
1. Header: ness DOWN button (⫺) (models without naviga-
Shows the path used to get to the current tion system).
screen. (i.e. push SETTING button > choose
“Comfort & Conv.” menu item.) Push and hold the “ OFF ” button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the
2. Menu Selections: button again to turn the display on.
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen. (i.e. Auto Interior Illumination,
etc.)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
HOW TO USE DISP BUTTON (models Vehicle information display
without navigation system) 1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.
Push the DISP button to show the display 2. Choose an item using the INFINITI control-
setting screen. (See “Display settings” later in ler and push the ENTER button.
this section.) 3. After viewing or adjusting the information
on the following screens, push the BACK
HOW TO USE TRIP BUTTON (models button to return to the INFORMATION
without navigation system) menu.
Push the TRIP button to show the trip computer See the separate Navigation System Owner’s
display. (See “Trip Computer information” later Manual for the following items:
in this section.)
SAA1803
● Traffic Info.
HOW TO USE FUEL ECON BUTTON ● Where am I?
(models without navigation system) With navigation system
● GPS Satellite Info.
Push the FUEL ECON button to show the fuel
economy information. (See “Fuel Economy infor-
mation” later in this section.)
HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON
The display screen shows vehicle and naviga-
tion (if so equipped) information for your con-
venience.
The information shown on the screen should be
a guide to determine the condition of the ve-
hicle. See the following for details.
SAA1805
Without navigation system

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Fuel Economy information
The distance to empty, average fuel economy
and current fuel economy (shown on the right
side bar) will be displayed for reference.
To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use the
INFINITI controller to highlight the “Reset ” key
and push the ENTER button.
If the “View ” key is highlighted with the
INFINITI controller and the ENTER button is
pushed, the average fuel consumption history
will be displayed in graph form along with the
SAA1546 average for the previous Reset-to-Reset period. SAA1450

The unit can be converted between “US” and Tire Pressure information
“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” The tire pressure will be displayed for refer-
later in this section.) ence.
For models without the navigation system, the The pressure indication “** psi” on the screen
information can be displayed by pushing the
means that the tire pressure is being measured.
FUEL ECON button on the control panel.
After a few driving trips, the pressure for each
tire will be displayed.
In case of low tire pressure, LOW PRESSURE
information will be displayed on the screen.
Check the pressure for all tires.
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition
and the temperature.
SAA1547

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
After tire rotation is performed, tire pressure Trip Computer information
will not be displayed in the actual tire position.
Drive the vehicle at over 25 MPH (40 km/h) for Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Average
approximately 10 minutes to reset the display. Speed will be displayed.
For more details about the Tire Pressure Moni- To reset each set of trip computer information,
toring System (TPMS), see “TIRE PRESSURE use the INFINITI controller to highlight the “Re-
MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Start- set ” key and push the ENTER button.
ing and driving” section. The unit can be converted between “US” and
“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON”
WARNING later in this section.)
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, SAA1806
the TPMS will not function and the low tire
pressure warning light will flash for approxi- With navigation system
mately 1 minute. The light will remain on
after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI dealer
as soon as possible for tire replacement
and/or system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the proper
operation of the TPMS.

SAA1305
Without navigation system

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Maintenance information
The maintenance intervals can be displayed for
your desired maintenance items.
To set the maintenance interval for Reminders 1
to 4, choose an item using the INFINITI control-
ler and push the ENTER button.
You can also set to display a message to remind
you that the maintenance needs to be per-
formed.
The following example shows how to set Re-
SAA1554 minder 1. Use the same steps to set the other SAA1555
maintenance information.
With navigation system With navigation system

1. Reset the driving distance to the new


maintenance schedule.
2. Set the interval (mileage) of the mainte-
nance schedule. To determine the recom-
mended maintenance interval, refer to
your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide”.
3. To display the reminder automatically
when the set trip distance is reached,
highlight the “Interval Reminder ” key
with the INFINITI controller and push the
SAA1807 ENTER button.
Without navigation system 4. To return the display to MAINTENANCE
INFO., push the BACK button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Maintenance information display cannot be op- The maintenance reminder screen is displayed
erated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the each time the ignition switch is pushed to the
vehicle in a safe place to see the information. ON position unless one of the following opera-
tions is performed:
The unit can be converted between “US” and
“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” ● “Reset Distance” is selected.
later in this section.) ● “Interval Reminder” is set to OFF.
● the maintenance interval is set again.

SAA1611
The Reminder will be automatically displayed as
shown when both of the following conditions
are met:
● the vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK posi-
tion.
● the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or
ON position the next time you drive the
vehicle after the set value has been reached.
To return to the previous display after the
maintenance reminder screen is displayed,
push the BACK button.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Command List
Displays a list of voice commands that the
system can recognize.
User Guide
Displays a simplified operation manual of the
voice recognition system and how to use the
voice commands.
Navigation Version information
(models with navigation system)
The version of the navigation system will be
SAA1808 SAA1592
displayed.
Others information (models with Voice Recognition information
navigation system) (models with navigation system)
Select the “Others” key and push the ENTER When you use the INFINITI Voice Recognition
button to show “Voice Recognition” and “Navi- system for the first time or if you do not know
gation Version”. how to operate it, you can display the voice
command list or user guide for confirmation.
(See “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
(models with navigation system)” later in this
section for the details.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
WARNING DISPLAY
The warning display will appear when one of the
following conditions occurs while driving at a
speed over 3 MPH (5 km/h).
● Any door is not securely closed. (The corre-
sponding door will be indicated on the dis-
play.)
● The trunk lid is not securely closed.
The warning display will turn off when the
vehicle speed slows down under 3 MPH
(5 km/h) even if a door or trunk lid is not SAA1804
securely closed yet.
SAA1187
With navigation system
Make sure to stop the vehicle and close a door
or trunk lid securely.

SAA1514
Without navigation system
SAA1188

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON Audio settings
The display for vehicle settings will appear The following display will appear when pushing
when the SETTING button on the control panel the SETTING button, selecting the “Audio ” key
is pushed. with the INFINITI controller and pushing the
For navigation settings, refer to the separate ENTER button.
Navigation System Owner’s Manual. Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade :
To show the “Comfort & Conv.” item, push the To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound
ignition switch to the ON position. balance, select the “Bass ”, “Treble ”, “Balance
” or “Fade ” key and adjust it with the INFINITI
controller.
SAA1809
These items can also be adjusted by pushing
With navigation system and turning the AUDIO knob.
BOSE姞 Centerpoint姞 (if so equipped) :
When this item is turned to ON, an exciting
surround sound is generated from a traditional
stereo recording.
BOSE姞 AudioPilot姞 (if so equipped) :
When this item is turned to ON, AudioPilot姞
monitors noise in the passenger compartment
with a microphone and compensates for any
unpleasant noise.
Surround Volume (if so equipped) :
SAA1810 To adjust the surround sound volume, select
Without navigation system “Surround Vol.” and adjust it with the INFINITI
controller.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
Precision Phased Audio (if so equipped) When any mode button is pushed with the
screen off, the screen turns on for further
When this item is turned to ON, super high pitch
operation. The screen will turn off automatically
sound and super low pitch sound are empha-
5 seconds after the operation is finished.
sized and midrange sound is played naturally.
To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON
Speed Sensitive Vol. (if so equipped)
position, or push the “ OFF ” button.
Sound volume is increased according to the
vehicle speed. Choose the effect level from OFF Brightness/Contrast/Background Color
(0) to 5. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the
screen, select the “Brightness ” or “Contrast ”
key and push the ENTER button.
SAA1813 Then, you can adjust the brightness to “Darker”
or “Brighter”, and the contrast to “Lower” or
With navigation system “Higher” using the INFINITI controller.
Display settings For information on the “Background Color ” key,
refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
The following display will appear when pushing er’s Manual.
the SETTING button, selecting “Display ” key
with the INFINITI controller and pushing the Navigation settings (models with
ENTER button. navigation system)
For models without the navigation system, the For the details of “Navigation” settings, refer to
setting screen can be displayed by pushing the the separate Navigation System Owner’s
DISP button on the control panel. Manual.
Display
To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button
and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other
method is to push and hold the “ OFF ”
button for more than 2 seconds.
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
The rear display can be also opened or closed
using the remote controller. (See “INFINITI MO-
BILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (MES)” later in
this section.)

SAA2146 SAA1561
Rear Display settings (if so equipped) Volume and Beeps settings (models
The following display will appear when pushing with navigation system)
the SETTING button, selecting the “Rear Dis- The following display will appear when pushing
play” key with the INFINITI controller and push- the SETTING button, selecting the “Volume and
ing the ENTER button. Beeps ” key with the INFINITI controller and
Rear Display pushing the ENTER button.

To open the rear display, push the ENTER Guidance Vol.


button. The rear display is flipped down auto- To adjust the guidance voice volume louder or
matically. To close the rear display, push the softer, select the “Guidance Volume” and ad-
ENTER button and turn the “OK” indicator off. just it with the INFINITI controller.
The rear display will be closed automatically You can also adjust the guidance voice volume
when the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice
position. guidance is being announced.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Guidance Voice
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear
voice guidance in the navigation (if so
equipped) operation or in other operations.
Ringer Vol./Incoming Call/Outgoing Call
For the details of these items, see
“BLUETOOTH姞 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” later in this sec-
tion.
Button Beeps
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a SAA1612 SAA1563
beep sound when you use a button. Beeps settings (models without Clock settings (models with
navigation system) navigation system)
The following display will appear when pushing The following display will appear when pushing
the SETTING button, selecting the “Beeps ” key the SETTING button, selecting the “Clock ” key
with the INFINITI controller and pushing the with the INFINITI controller and pushing the
ENTER button. ENTER button.
Button Beeps On-screen Clock
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a When this item is turned to ON, a clock is
beep sound when you use a button. always displayed in the upper right corner of
Phone settings (models with the screen.
navigation system) This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS
For the details of “Phone” settings, see
system.
“BLUETOOTH姞 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM” later in this section.
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Clock Format
Choose either the 12-hour clock display or the
24-hour clock display.
Offset Adjust
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per
minute.
Daylight Saving Time
Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time
application.
Time Zone SAA1815 SAA1933
Choose the time zone from the following Others settings (models with Example
● Pacific navigation system)
Comfort & Conv. settings
● Mountain Select the “Others ” key and push the ENTER
● Central button to show “Comfort & Conv.”, “Voice Rec- The following display will appear when pushing
ognition” and “Language/Units”. the SETTING button, selecting the “Comfort &
● Eastern Conv. ” key* with the INFINITI controller and
● Atlantic pushing the ENTER button. This key does not
appear on the display until the ignition switch is
● Newfoundland
pushed to the ON position.
● Hawaii
* For models with the navigation system, select
● Aleutian the “Others ” key to show the Comfort & Conv.
● Alaska ” key.
Auto Interior Illumination
When this item is turned to ON, the interior
lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Auto Headlights Sensitivity (if so equipped) Lift Steering Wheel on Exit (if so equipped)
Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic head- When this item is turned to ON, the steering
lights higher (right) or lower (left). wheel moves upward for easy exit if the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position and the driver’s
Auto Headlights Off Delay (if so equipped)
door is opened. After getting into the vehicle
Choose the duration of the automatic headlight and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC
off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and position, the steering wheel moves to the pre-
180 second periods. vious position.
Selective Door Unlock Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit (if so equipped)
When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s seat
door is unlocked first after the door unlock moves backward for easy exit if the ignition
operation. When the door handle request switch is in the LOCK position and the driver’s SAA1816
switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is opened. After getting into the vehicle With navigation system
door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corre- and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC
sponding door is unlocked first. All the doors position, the driver’s seat moves to the previous Language/Units settings
can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is position.
performed again within 5 seconds. The following display will appear when pushing
Return All Settings to Default the SETTING button, selecting the
When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors “Language/Units ” key* with the INFINITI con-
Select this item, push the ENTER button and
will be unlocked after the door unlock operation troller and pushing the ENTER button.
choose “YES” if you want to return all settings
is performed once.
to the default. * For models with the navigation system, se-
Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock lect the “Others” key to show the
Voice Recognition settings (models
When this item is turned to ON, door ‘‘Language/Units” key.
with navigation system)
lock/unlock function by pushing the door
handle request switch will be activated. For details about the “Voice Recognition” set-
tings, see “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYS-
TEM (models with navigation system)” later in
this section.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Select Language : HOW TO USE AUX BUTTON
Choose the “Select Language ” key and push Images being played can be switched to the
the ENTER button. From the following display, center display if NTSC compatible devices are
select “English”, “Français” or “Español”* for connected to the auxiliary input jacks on the
your favorite display appearance. rear side of the center console. (See “AUXILIARY
INPUT JACKS” later in this section.)
NOTE:
Push the DISC·AUX (with navigation) AUX (with-
If you select the ⬙Français⬙ key, French language out navigation) button to perform switching.
will be displayed, refer to the French Owner’s
Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual, see Pushing the DISC·AUX button (for models with
⬙Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Order infor- the navigation system) will switch the displays
mation⬙ in the ⬙9. Technical and consumer infor- as follows:
SAA1567
mation⬙ section. CD → CompactFlash* → DVD* → AUX → iPod姞*
→ Music Box* → CD With navigation system
*: For models without navigation system only
Select Units : *: if so equipped Display Mode
Choose the “Select Units ” key and push the The above display will appear when the “Set-
ENTER button. From the following display, se- ting ” key is selected using the INFINITI control-
lect “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, °C, ler and pushing the ENTER button.
L/100 km) for your favorite display appearance. Choose the display mode from the following:
Select Units (Tire Pressure) : ● Normal
Choose the “Select Units (Tire Pressure) ” key ● Wide
and push the ENTER button. From the following
display, select “kPa” or “psi”. ● Cinema

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

HOW TO USE DISC BUTTON (for When the selector lever is shifted into the R ● Do not put anything on the rear view camera.
models without navigation system) (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows The rear view camera is installed above the
the view to the rear of the vehicle. license plate.
Push the DISC button to play the Compact Disc
(CD). See “AUDIO SYSTEM” later in this section. The system is designed as an aid to the driver in ● When washing the vehicle with high-
detecting large stationary objects to help avoid pressure water, be sure not to spray it
damaging the vehicle. The system will not de- around the camera. Otherwise, water may
tect small objects below the bumper and may enter the camera unit causing water conden-
not detect objects close to the bumper or on the sation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an
ground. electric shock.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a precision
WARNING instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction
● The rear view camera is a convenience but it or cause damage resulting in a fire or an
is not a substitute for proper backing up. electric shock.
Always turn and check that it is safe to do so
before backing up. Always back up slowly.
● Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor dif-
CAUTION
fer from actual distance because a wide- There is a plastic cover over the camera. Do not
angle lens is used. Objects in the RearView scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow
Monitor will appear visually opposite like from the cover.
ones viewed in the inside and outside
mirrors.
● Make sure that the trunk is securely closed
when backing up.
● Underneath the bumper and the corner areas
of the bumper cannot be viewed on the Rear-
View Monitor because of its monitoring
range limitation.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Predicted course lines 䊊
6 :
● If the battery is disconnected or becomes
Indicate the predicted course when backing up. discharged, the predicted course lines may
The predicted course lines will be displayed on be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, drive
the monitor when the selector lever is in the R ( the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5
Reverse) position and the steering wheel is minutes.
turned. The predicted course lines will move ● When the steering wheel is turned with the
depending on how much the steering wheel is ignition switch in the ACC position, the pre-
turned and will not be displayed while the dicted course lines may be displayed
steering wheel is in the neutral position. incorrectly.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED ● The displayed lines will appear slightly off to
the right because the rear view camera is not
COURSE LINES installed in the rear center of the vehicle.
SAA1896
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES WARNING ● The distance guide line and the vehicle
width guide line should be used as a refer-
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width ● Always turn and check that it is safe to do so ence only when the vehicle is on a level
and distances to objects with reference to the before backing up. Always back up slowly. paved surface. The distance viewed on the
bumper line 䊊A are displayed on the monitor.
● Use the displayed lines as a reference. The monitor is for reference only and may be
lines are highly affected by the number of different than the actual distance between
Distance guide lines:
occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road the vehicle and displayed objects.
Indicate distances from the bumper. condition and road grade. ● When backing up the vehicle up a hill, ob-
● Red line 䊊
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) ● If the tires are replaced with different sized jects viewed in the monitor are further than
they appear. When backing up the vehicle
● Yellow line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) tires, the predicted course line may be dis-
played incorrectly. down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor
● Green line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) are closer than they appear. Use the inside
● On a snow-covered or slippery road, there mirror or glance over your shoulder to prop-
● Green line 䊊
4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) may be a difference between the predicted erly judge distances to other objects.
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
5 : course line and the actual course line.

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
The vehicle width and predicted course lines are
wider than the actual width and course.

SAA1897 SAA1898
1. Visually check that the parking space is 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
safe before parking your vehicle. steering wheel so that the predicted
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed course lines 䊊
B enter the parking space
on the screen 䊊A when the selector lever 䊊C .
is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the (1.0 m) distance on the hill is the place 䊊
B . Note
vehicle width guide lines 䊊 D parallel to that any object on the hill is viewed in the
the parking space 䊊 C while referring to monitor further than it appears.
the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the selector lever to the
P (Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND
ACTUAL DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface.
The distance viewed on the monitor is for
reference only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle and dis-
played objects.

SAA1899
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft
(1.0 m) to the place 䊊A , but the actual 3 ft

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
(1.0 m) distance on the hill is the place 䊊
B . Note
that any object on the hill is viewed in the
monitor closer than it appears.

SAA1900 SAA1923
Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting object
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the The predicted course lines 䊊A do not touch the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width object in the display. However, the vehicle may
guide lines are shown further than the actual hit the object if it projects over the actual
distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft backing up course.
(1.0 m) to the place 䊊A , but the actual 3 ft

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
when backing up to the position 䊊A if the object ● When the temperature is extremely high or
projects over the actual backing up course. low, the screen may not clearly display
objects. This is not a malfunction.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
● When strong light directly enters the cam-
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint, era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView This is not a malfunction.
Monitor, push the SETTING button with the
RearView Monitor on, select the item key and ● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
adjust the level using the INFINITI controller. screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Con-
trast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor ● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the light. This is not a malfunction.
parking brake is firmly applied and the engine
● The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
is not running.
tor may differ somewhat from those of the
OPERATING TIPS actual object.
● When the selector lever is shifted to the R ● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto- dark place or at night. This is not a malfunc-
matically changes to the RearView Monitor tion.
mode. However, the radio can be heard.
● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
● It may take some time until the RearView the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis-
Monitor or the normal screen is displayed play objects. Clean the camera.
SAA1924 after the selector lever has been shifted to R
from another position or to another position ● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
Backing up behind a projecting clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
from R. Objects may be distorted momen-
object tarily until the RearView Monitor screen is tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
The position 䊊 C is shown further than the displayed completely. dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent
position 䊊B in the display. However, the posi- and then wipe with a dry cloth.
tion 䊊C is actually at the same distance as the ● Do not damage the camera as the monitor
position 䊊A . The vehicle may hit the object screen may be adversely affected.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
VENTILATORS

● Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe


Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction
off any wax with a clean cloth dampened
of ventilators.
with mild detergent diluted with water.
: This symbol indicates that the vents are
closed.

: This symbol indicates that the vents are


open.

SAA1100
Front

SAA1101
Rear

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the support of others alone
in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone
either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in
a closed vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal in-
juries to people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for long
periods as it may cause the interior air to SAA1817
become stale and the windows to fog up. You can individually set the driver and front
passenger side temperature and air flow using
each temperature control button and manual air
Start the engine and operate the automatic flow control button. (DUAL mode)
climate control system.
When the “STATUS” button is pushed, the
automatic climate control status screen will
appear. (See “HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON”
earlier in this section.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Automatic operation
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO) :
This mode may be used all year round. The
system works automatically to control the in-
side temperature, air flow distribution and fan
speed after the preferred temperature is set
manually.
1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator
on the button will illuminate and AUTO will
be displayed.)
2. Push the temperature control dial (driver
SSI0095 side) to set the desired temperature.
1. “MODE” manual air flow control button 8. Temperature control dial (passenger side)
Adjust the temperature to about 75°F (24°C)
(driver side) 9. “MODE” manual air flow control button for normal operation.
2. Temperature control dial (driver side) (passenger side)
The temperature of the passenger compart-
3. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON but- 10. “OFF” button for climate control system ment will be maintained automatically. Air
ton flow distribution and fan speed will also be
11. “ ” rear window defroster button
4. “ ” front defroster button (See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIR- controlled automatically.
ROR DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. In- 3. You can individually set driver and front
5. “ ” automatic upper vent system passenger side temperature using each
struments and controls” section.)
ON/OFF button temperature control button. When the
6. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button 12. “ ” intake air control button “DUAL” button or the passenger side tem-
13. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button perature control button is pushed, the
7. “ ” fan speed increase button DUAL indicator will come on.
14. “ ” fan speed decrease button
To turn off the passenger side temperature
control, push the “DUAL” button.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
A visible mist may be seen coming from the ● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the Air recirculation
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is windows, push the fan speed increase but-
Push the intake air control button
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal- ton “ ” and set it to the maximum
function. “ ” to recirculate interior air inside
position.
the vehicle. The indicator light on the “ ”
Heating (A/C OFF) ● As soon as possible after the windshield is side will come on.
The air conditioner does not activate in this clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to
the AUTO mode. The air recirculation mode cannot be activated
mode. When you need to heat only, use this when the air conditioner is in the front defrost-
mode. ● When the “ ” front defroster button is ing mode “ ”.
1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator pushed, the air conditioner will automati-
will turn off.) cally be turned on at outside temperatures Outside air circulation
2. Push the temperature control button to above 23°F (⫺5°C) to defog the windshield, Push the intake air control button
set the desired temperature. and the air recirculate mode will automati-
cally be turned off. “ ” to draw outside air into the
● The temperature of the passenger compart- passenger compartment. The indicator light on
ment will be maintained automatically. Air Outside air is drawn into the passenger the “ ” side will come on.
flow distribution and fan speed are also compartment to improve the defogging per-
formance. Automatic intake air control
controlled automatically.
● Do not set the temperature lower than the To turn the system off In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-
outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys- trolled automatically. To manually control the
Push the “OFF” button. intake air, push the intake air control button
tem may not work properly.
Manual operation “ ”. To return to the automatic con-
● Not recommended if windows fog up. trol mode, push the intake air control button
Fan speed control
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging “ ” for about 2 seconds. The indi-
1. Push the “ ” front defroster button. Push the fan speed increase “ ” or de- cator lights (both air recirculation and outside
(The indicator light on the button will crease “ ” buttons to manually control the air circulation sides) will flash twice, and then
come on.) fan speed. the intake air will be controlled automatically.
2. Push the temperature control button to Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic
set the desired temperature. control of the fan speed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Air flow control : To turn the system off :
Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control Push the “OFF” button.
button selects the air outlet to:
Ambient temperature
: Air flows from center and side ventila- The ambient temperature will be displayed.
tors.
The ambient temperature sensor is located in
: Air flows from center and side ventila- front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected
tors and foot outlets. by road or engine heat, wind direction and other
driving conditions. The display may differ from
: Air flows mainly from foot outlets. the actual ambient temperature or the tempera-
ture displayed on various signs or billboards.
: Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.
Automatic upper vent system
When the “ ” automatic upper vent button
is pushed, the air flow against the driver’s or
passenger’s upper body becomes gentle. The
indicator light on the button will come on.
In this mode, air from the center ventilators
flows both straight and upward in order to
control the cabin temperature without blowing
air directly on the occupants. SAA1103

Distribution between straight and upward flows 1. AUTO button


will be determined automatically by the climate
control system. 2. Fan speed control button
If you prefer strong air flow against your upper 3. Temperature control button
body, push the “ ” button to turn the
indicator light off.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
REAR SWITCHES FOR CLIMATE The filter should be replaced if air flow is ex-
CONTROL (if so equipped) tremely decreased or when windows fog up eas-
ily when operating heater or air conditioning
The rear seat passengers can adjust the climate system.
control system using the climate controls in the
rear armrest panel. SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL
“AUTO ” button: automatic climate control The climate control system in your INFINITI is
mode on charged with a refrigerant designed with the
environment in mind. This refrigerant will not
“ ” button: Fan speed control up (Max fan harm the earth’s ozone layer. However, special
speed → return to Low fan speed) charging equipment and lubricant are required
when servicing your INFINITI air conditioner.
“ ” button: Temperature control up/down Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will
SIC2768
cause severe damage to your climate control
OPERATING TIPS The sunload sensor 䊊A on the instrument panel
system. (See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
When the engine coolant temperature and out- helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and
side air temperature are low, the air flow from put anything on or around this sensor. consumer information” section for climate con-
the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum trol system refrigerant and lubricant recommen-
of 150 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
dations.)
the coolant temperature warms up, air will flow The climate control system is equipped with an
normally from the foot outlets. Your INFINITI dealer will be able to service your
in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, environmentally friendly climate control sys-
dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner tem.
heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace
the filter in accordance with the maintenance WARNING
schedule in the INFINITI Service and Mainte-
nance Guide. To replace the filter, contact an The system contains refrigerant under high
INFINITI dealer. pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air con-
ditioner service should be done only by an ex-
perienced technician with the proper
equipment.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
AUDIO SYSTEM

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS However there are some general characteristics


Radio of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle,
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON even when the finest equipment is used. These
position and push the radio band select button characteristics are completely normal in a given
to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio reception area, and do not indicate any mal-
with the engine not running, the ignition switch function in your INFINITI radio system.
should be pushed to the ACC position.
Reception conditions will constantly change
Radio reception is affected by station signal because of vehicle movement. Buildings, ter-
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- rain, signal distance and interference from
ings, bridges, mountains and other external other vehicles can work against ideal reception.
influences. Intermittent changes in reception Described below are some of the factors that
quality normally are caused by these external can affect your radio reception. SAA0306
influences. FM radio reception
Some cellular phones or other devices may
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30
influence radio reception quality. from the audio system speakers. Storing the miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single
device in a different location may reduce or
Radio reception channel) FM having slightly more range than
eliminate the noise.
stereo FM. External influences may sometimes
Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance interfere with FM station reception even if the
radio reception. These circuits are designed to FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The
extend reception range, and to enhance the strength of the FM signal is directly related to
quality of that reception. the distance between the transmitter and re-
ceiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path,
exhibiting many of the same characteristics as
light. For example they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to
fade and/or drift.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Static and flutter: During signal interference Satellite radio reception :
from buildings, large hills or due to antenna
When the satellite radio (if so equipped) is first
position, usually in conjunction with increased installed or the battery has been replaced, the
distance from the station transmitter, static or satellite radio may not work properly. This is not
flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with
lowering the treble setting to reduce the treble satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any
response. metal or large building for satellite radio to
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective receive all of the necessary data.
characteristics of FM signals, direct and re- The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless
flected signals reach the receiver at the same an optional satellite receiver and antenna are
time. The signals may cancel each other, result- installed and an XM姞 satellite radio service
ing in momentary flutter or loss of sound. subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
AM radio reception :
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite
bend around objects and skip along the ground. radio signal.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite
these characteristics. AM signals are also sub- antenna.
ject to interference as they travel from transmit- A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna
ter to receiver. can affect satellite radio performance. Remove
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing the ice to restore satellite radio reception.
SAA0480
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several Compact Disc (CD) player
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in ● Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert
areas where no obstacles exist. slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical changer/player.
power lines, electric signs and even traffic ● Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed
lights. could damage the CD and/or CD changer.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
● During cold weather or rainy days, the player – CDs with a paper label CompactFlash (CF) player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ven-
– CDs that are warped, scratched, or have ● Do not force a CF card into the slot. This could
abnormal edges damage the CF card and/or player.
tilate the player completely.
● This audio system can only play prerecorded ● During cold weather or rainy days, the player
● The player may skip while driving on rough
CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
roads.
CDs. occurs, remove the CF card and dehumidify or
● The CD player sometimes cannot function ventilate the player completely.
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the follow-
when the passenger compartment tempera- ● The CF player sometimes cannot function
ing messages will be displayed.
ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem- when the passenger compartment tempera-
perature before use. CHECK DISC: ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-
● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round – Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly perature before use.
discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL (the label side is facing up, etc.). ● Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight.
AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.
– Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped ● Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly.
● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. and it is free of scratches.
iPod姞 player
● CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, PUSH EJECT:
covered with fingerprints, or that have pin ● Some characters used in other languages
holes may not work properly. This is an error due to the temperature inside (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
the player is too high. Remove the CD by properly on the vehicle center screen. We rec-
● The following CDs may not work properly: pushing the EJECT button, and after a short ommend using English language characters
– Copy control compact discs (CCCD) time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played with an iPod姞.
when the temperature of the player returns to ● Large video podcast files cause slow re-
– Recordable compact discs (CD-R) normal. sponses in the iPod姞. The vehicle center dis-
– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) play may momentarily black out, but it will
UNPLAYABLE:
● Do not use the following CDs as they may soon recover.
The file is unplayable in this audio system
cause the CD player to malfunction. ● If the iPod姞 automatically selects large video
(only MP3 or WMA CD).
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
– 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
vehicle center display may momentarily
– CDs that are not round black out, but it will soon recover.
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Improperly plugging in the iPod姞 may cause – Pull or drop the cable. ● Do not use the cable for any other purposes
a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flick- other than its intended use in the vehicle.
– Close the center console lid on the cable or
ering). Always make sure that the iPod姞 is
connectors. * iPod姞 is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
connected properly.
in the U.S. and other countries.
● The iPod姞 nano (2nd Generation) will con- – Store objects with sharp edges in the stor-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon- age where the cable is stored. Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash (CF)
nected during a seek operation. – Spill liquids on the cable and connectors. with MP3 or WMA
● An incorrect song title may appear when the ● Do not connect the cable to the iPod姞 if the Explanation of terms
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod姞 cable and/or connectors are wet. It may dam- ● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
nano (2nd Generation). age the iPod姞. Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
● Audiobooks may not play in the same order ● If the cable and connectors are exposed to most well known compressed digital audio
as they appear on the iPod姞. water, allow the cable and/or connectors to file format. This format allows for near “CD
● The iPod姞 nano (1st Generation) may remain dry completely before connecting the cable quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con- to the iPod姞 (wait 24 hours for it to dry). of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file
nected during a seek operation. In this case, ● If the connector is exposed to fluids other
please manually reset the iPod姞. size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:
than water, evaporative residue may cause a
44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no
● If you are using an iPod姞 (3rd Generation with short between the connector pins. In this perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression
Dock connector), do not use very long names case, replace the cable, otherwise damage to removes the redundant and irrelevant parts
for the song title, album name or artist name the iPod姞 and a loss of function may occur. of a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t
to avoid the iPod姞 from resetting itself. ● If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, con- hear.
● Be careful not to do the following, or the nectors cracked, contamination such as liq- ● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
cable could be damaged and a loss of func- uids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not compressed audio format created by Mi-
tion may occur. use the cable and contact an INFINITI dealer crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
to replace the cable with a new one. codec offers greater file compression than
– Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40 mm)
● When not in use for extended periods of time, the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
radius minimum).
store the cable in a clean, dust free environ- digital audio tracks in the same amount of
– Twist the cable excessively (more than ment at room temperature and without direct space when compared to MP3s at the same
180 degrees). sun exposure. level of quality.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of ● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
bits per second used by a digital music files. WMA files are not shown in the display.
The size and quality of a compressed digital ● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
audio file is determined by the bit rate used “Root Folder” is displayed.
when encoding the file.
● The playback order is the order in which the
● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency files were written by the writing software.
is the rate at which the samples of a signal Therefore the files might not play in the
are converted from analog to digital (A/D desired order.
conversion) per second.
● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is
called a multisession. SAA1025
● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part
of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that con-
tains information about the digital music file
such as song title, artist, album title, encod-
ing bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag
information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
* Windows姞 and Windows Media姞 are regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America Playback order chart
and/or other countries.
Playback order
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk
Corporation in the United States of America Music playback order of a CD/CF with MP3 or
and/or other countries. WMA files is as illustrated.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Specification chart
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF
CD, CD-R, CD-RW:
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported file systems * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not
supported.
CompactFlash card:
FAT12, FAT16, FAT32
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Supported Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
versions*1 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
With navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Folder levels
Without navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation With navigation system: 128 characters
Without navigation system: 64 characters
Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big
Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

췽—

09/02/08—pattie 墍
Troubleshooting guide
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1
hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files
(CD-DA data) will be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the charac-
ter codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the
specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or
the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before the mu- If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be
sic starts playing. required before the music starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing
width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song when When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play
playing. is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the desired The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not
order. play in the desired order.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
9. CD EJECT button
10. CompactFlash (CF) card slot (located un-
der the audio unit) (if so equipped)
No satellite radio reception is available unless
the satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and there is an active XM姞 satellite radio ser-
vice subscription.
The audio control buttons are also located on
the center multi-function control panel.

SAA1818
1. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob 5. Radio PRESET A-B-C selector button
2. Radio station preset and CD selector but- 6. Radio SCAN (tuning)/CD RPT (repeat) play
tons button
3. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selector / 7. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button
AUDIO control knob for SEEK/TRACK
4. CD LOAD button (if so equipped) 8. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
It may take some time to receive the activation
signal after subscribing to the XM姞 satellite
radio. After receiving the activation signal, an
available station list will be automatically up-
dated in the radio. Push the ignition switch from
LOCK to ACC to update the station list.
Audio main operation
Head unit
The radio has an FM diversity reception system,
which employs two antennas printed on the
SAA1819 SAA1820 rear window. This system automatically
switches to the antenna which is receiving less
With navigation system Without navigation system
interference.

1. AM·FM·SAT band select button 1. RADIO AM·FM band select button The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
2. DISC·AUX button 2. AUX button radio reception and CD playback.
3. DISC button
ON·OFF/Volume control
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
DISC (CD) PLAYER/CHANGER position, and then push the ON·OFF/VOLUME
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO OP- control knob while the system is off to call up
ERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this section. the audio mode which was playing immediately
before the system was turned off. While the
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless system is on, pushing the ON·OFF/VOLUME
the satellite receiver and antenna are installed control knob turns the system off.
and there is an active XM姞 satellite radio ser-
vice subscription. Satellite radio is not available Turn the ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob to ad-
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. just the volume.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance : When the radio band select button is pushed SEEK tuning/CATEGORY
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON (CAT) :
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push
position, the radio will come on at the station
the Audio control knob. When the display
last played. ● For AM and FM radio
shows the setting you want to change (Bass,
Treble, Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio The last station played will also come on when Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button
control knob to set the desired setting. For the the ON·OFF/VOL control knob is pushed to ON. or to tune from low to high or high to
other setting methods, see “HOW TO USE SET- low frequencies and to stop at the next
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless broadcasting station.
TING BUTTON” earlier in this section.
the satellite receiver and antenna are installed
This vehicle has some sound effect functions as and there is an active XM姞 satellite radio ser- ● For satellite radio
follows (if so equipped): vice subscription. Satellite radio is not available Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button
● BOSE姞 Centerpoint姞 in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
or to tune to the first station of the
● BOSE姞 AudioPilot姞 If another audio source is playing when the next or previous category.
radio band select button is turned to ON, the
● Precision Phased Audio audio source will automatically be turned off During satellite radio reception, the following
notices will be displayed under certain condi-
● Speed Sensitive Volume and the last radio station played will come on.
tions.
For more details, see “VEHICLE INFORMATION When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
● NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the
AND SETTINGS” earlier in this section. radio will automatically change from stereo to
SAT tuner is connected.)
monaural reception.
FM-AM-SAT radio operation ● OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)
TUNE (Tuning) :
or RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band ● ANTENNA ERROR (Antenna connection error)
● For AM and FM radio
select : ● LOADING (When the initial setting is per-
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob for manual tun- formed)
Pushing the radio band select button will ing.
change the band as follows: ● UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-
● For satellite radio scription is not active)
AM → FM → SAT → AM
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to seek stations
● INVALID CH (Invalid station is received.)
from all of the categories when any CAT is
not selected.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

췽—

06/10/08—pattie 墍
SCAN tuning : 3. Select the desired station and push and control panel, push this button while the satel-
hold the desired station preset button lite programming is selected to show the text
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to until a beep sound is information.
to high frequencies and stop at each broadcast- heard. (The radio mutes when the select
ing station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button Compact Disc (CD) player/changer
button is pushed.)
again during this 5-second period will stop operation
4. The station indicator will then come on
SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to and the sound will resume. Memorizing is Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
that station. now complete. position, push the LOAD button (if so equipped)
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5. Other buttons can be set in the same and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into the slot
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next manner. with the label side facing up. The CD will be
station. guided automatically into the slot and start
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the playing.
PRESET select : fuse opens, the radio memory will be erased. In
that case, reset the desired stations. After loading the CD, the number of tracks on
Push the PRESET select button to go to the next the CD and the play time will appear on the
Text :
PRESET. After choosing from the PRESET A, B or display.
C, you can select the desired station using the When the “Text ” key is selected with the
INFINITI controller on the display and then the If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
INFINITI controller or pushing the station preset cally turn off and the CD will play.
ENTER button is pushed while the satellite radio
buttons to .
is being played, the text information will be If the system has been turned off while the CD
to Station memory operations : displayed on the screen. was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL control
● CH Name knob will start the CD.
6 stations can be set for PRESET A, B and C. The
PRESET A, B and C function allows you to store ● Category Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
a combination of FM, AM and SAT stations for ● Name
easy access. CD LOAD (if so equipped) :
● Title
1. Choose preset station A, B or C using the To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOAD
preset select button. ● Other
button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the
2. Tune to the desired station using the If your vehicle is equipped with the AUDIO TEXT loading position by pushing the CD insert select
SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button. “ ” button on the center multi-function button 䊊 1 to 䊊 6 , then insert the CD.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in succession, ● Track title The INFINITI controller can also be used to
push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 sec- select tracks when a CD is being played.
CD with MP3 or WMA:
onds.
● Folder title CD PLAY selection (CD changer only)
The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the
● File title To change to another CD already loaded into the
display.
player, push the CD play select buttons
● Song title
or CD PLAY to or choose a disc displayed on the
● Album title screen using the INFINITI controller.
When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with
● Artist
the system off and the CD loaded, the system REPEAT (RPT)
will turn on and the CD will start to play. If your vehicle is equipped with the AUDIO TEXT
“ ” button on the center multi-function When the SCAN·RPT button is pushed while the
When the DISC button is pushed with the CD CD is played, the play pattern can be changed
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will control panel, push this button while the CD is
being played to show the music information. as follows:
automatically be turned off and the CD will start
to play. (CD)
FF (Fast Forward), REW
When the DISC button is pushed while a CD is (Rewind)/APS (Automatic
loaded and a medium is played using the Program Search) FF, APS
auxiliary input jacks, you can toggle back and REW
forth between CD and medium. (CD with MP3 or WMA)
When the (fast forward) or (rewind)
Text button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
When the “Text ” key is selected in the screen while the CD is being played, the CD will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
using the INFINITI controller and then the ENTER
button is released, the CD will return to normal
button is pushed while the CD is being played,
play speed. “ALL DISC RPT” and “ALL DISC MIX” are avail-
the music information below will be displayed
on the screen. When the or button is pushed for able for CD changer model.
less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
CD:
played, the next track or the beginning of the
● Disc title current track on the CD will be played.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
CD EJECT : PLAY :

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected. system off and the CF card inserted, the system
To eject the discs selected by the CD select will turn on.
button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5 If another audio source is playing and a CF card
seconds. is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button repeat-
To eject all the discs (if so equipped), push the edly until the center display changes to the
EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds. CompactFlash mode.
When this button is pushed while the CD is Text :
being played, the CD will come out and the When the “Text” key is selected on the screen
system will turn off. SAA1822 using the INFINITI controller and then the ENTER
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will be COMPACTFLASH (CF) PLAYER button is pushed while the CF is being played,
pulled back into the slot to protect it. OPERATION (if so equipped) the music information below will be displayed
on the screen.
Audio main operation ● Folder title
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON ● Song title
position, remove the cover 䊊1 and insert a CF
● Track title
card 䊊 2 into the slot. Then, push the
● Album Title
button repeatedly to switch to the Compact-
Flash mode. ● Artist
If the system has been turned off while the FF (Fast Forward), REW
CompactFlash card was playing, pushing the (Rewind)/APS (Automatic
ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the Com- Program Search) FF, APS
pactFlash card. REW :
When the (fast forward) or (re-
wind) button is pushed for more than 1.5 sec-
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

06/10/08—pattie 墍
onds while the CompactFlash (CF) card is being Messages
played, the CF card will play while fast forward-
The following messages will be displayed under
ing or rewinding. When the button is released, certain conditions.
the CF card will return to the normal play speed.
● Reading Compact Flash (The system is read-
When the or button is pushed for ing the CF card inserted in the slot.)
less than 1.5 seconds while the CF card is being ● No Compact Flash card (A CF card is not
played, the next track or the beginning of the inserted in the slot.)
current track on the CF will be played.
● Compact Flash read error (The system can-
The INFINITI controller can also be used to not read a CF card.)
select tracks when the CF card is being played.
● Unplayable file (The system cannot play a
Folder selection music file.) SAA1823
To change to another folder in the CF card, turn ● No audio file (The CF card inserted in the slot IPOD姞 PLAYER OPERATION (if so
the MP3/WMA folder selector or choose a folder or its folder does not contain any music
files.) equipped)
displayed on the screen using the INFINITI
controller. Compatibility with other media Connecting iPod姞
REPEAT (RPT) If a commercially available CF adapter is in- Open the console lid and connect the cable 䊊 1
serted into the slot, your memory media can as illustrated, and then connect the other end of
When the RPT button is pushed while the CF also be used. the cable to your iPod姞 䊊 2 . Your vehicle is
card is played, the play pattern can be changed
equipped with the specialized cable for con-
as follows:
necting the iPod姞 to your vehicle audio unit.
The battery of your iPod姞 is charged during the
connection to the vehicle.
The display on the iPod姞 shows an INFINITI
CF EJECT
screen when the connection is completed.
When the knob next to the CF slot is pushed While connecting the iPod姞 to the vehicle, the
with the CF card inserted, the CF card will be iPod姞 can only be operated by the vehicle audio
ejected. controls.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet, Audio main operation ● Songs
fully depress the center connector button to ● Podcasts
unlatch the connector and pull the connector Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button re- ● Genres
cable from the iPod姞, fully depress the side peatedly to switch to the iPod姞 mode.
● Composers
connector buttons and pull the iPod姞 connector If the system has been turned off while the
straight out of the iPod姞. ● Audiobooks
iPod姞 was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL
* iPod姞 is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered control knob will start the iPod姞. The following touch-panel buttons shown on
in the U.S. and other countries. the screen are also available:
DISC·AUX button
● : returns to the previous screen.
Compatibility When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the iPod姞 connected, the system ● : plays/pauses the music selected.
The following models are available: will turn on. If another audio source is playing
● Third generation iPod姞 (Firmware version 2.3 and the iPod姞 is connected, push the DISC·AUX FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind)/APS (Automatic
or later) (Audiobook and Podcast are not button repeatedly until the center display Program Search) FF, APS REW
available) changes to the iPod姞 mode.
When the or button is pushed for
● Fourth generation iPod姞 (Firmware version Interface more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod姞 is play-
3.1.1 or later) The interface for iPod姞 operation shown on the ing, the iPod姞 will play while fast forwarding or
● Fifth generation iPod姞 (Firmware version vehicle center display is similar to the iPod姞 rewinding. When the button is released, the
1.1.2 or later) interface. Use the INFINITI controller and the iPod姞 will return to the normal play speed.
ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod姞 with
● iPod姞 mini (Firmware version 1.41 or later) your favorite settings. When the or button is pushed for
less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod姞 is play-
● iPod姞 photo (Firmware version 1.2.1 or later) The following items can be chosen from the ing, the next track or the beginning of the
● iPod姞 nano (Firmware version 1.2 or later) menu list screen. For further information about current track on the iPod姞 will be played.
each item, see the iPod姞 Owner’s Manual.
Make sure that your iPod姞 firmware is updated. The INFINITI controller can also be used to
● Playlists
select tracks when the iPod姞 is playing.
● Artists
● Albums
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
REPEAT (RPT) : The following CDs can be recorded in the “MU-
SIC BOX” hard-disk drive audio system.
When the SCAN·RPT button is pushed while a ● CDs without MP3/WMA files
track is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows: ● Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs
● Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) specifi-
cation in CD-Extras
● First session of multisession disc
Extreme temperature conditions [below ⫺4°F
(⫺20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect the
performance of the hard disk. SAA1613

NOTE: Recording CDs


MUSIC BOX HARD-DISK DRIVE AUDIO 1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For
If the hard disk needs to be replaced due to a
SYSTEM (models with navigation malfunction, all stored music data will be the details of playing CDs, see “Compact
system) erased. Disc (CD) player/changer operation” ear-
The “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system lier in this section.
can store songs from CDs being played. The 2. Select the “REC ” key using the INFINITI
system has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity controller and push the ENTER button.
and can record up to 200 hours (approximately
2,900 songs). NOTE:
● The system starts playing and recording the
1st track on the CD when the “REC” key is
selected.
● Individual tracks from a CD cannot be re-
corded to the music box hard-disk drive.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

췽—

06/10/08—pattie 墍
● The skip, fast forward and rewind features The “Music Box” audio system cannot perform
are disabled while the CD is recording. recording under the following conditions.
● The recording process can be stopped at any ● There is not enough space in the hard disk
time. All tracks that were played before the ● The number of albums reaches the maximum
CD was stopped are stored. of 500.
● Individual tracks can be deleted from the ● The number of tracks reaches the maximum
hard-disk drive after the CD is recorded. of 3,000.
Automatic recording
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned
to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted.
SAA1614 (See “Music Box settings” later in this section.)
If the title information of the track being re- Stopping recording
corded is stored either in the hard-disk drive or
in the CD, the title is automatically displayed on To stop the recording, select the STOP button
the screen. For title acquisition from the hard- by touching the screen or using the INFINITI
disk drive, music recognition technology and controller.
related data are provided by Gracenote姞. If the CD is ejected, the audio system is turned
To view the details of the track, select the Text off or the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK
key by touching the screen or using the INFINITI position, the recording also stops.
controller. The track name and album title are
displayed on the screen.
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
skipping sounds, the mark is displayed
behind the track number.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Stopping playback : Play mode selection :
The system stops playing when: To change to another album or artist, turn the
MP3/WMA folder selector.
a. another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash or
AUX) is selected. REPEAT (RPT) :
b. the audio system is turned off. When the SCAN·RPT button is pushed while a
c. the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK track is being played, the play pattern can be
position. changed as follows:

FF (Fast Forward), REW


(Rewind)/APS (Automatic
SAA1615 Program Search) FF, APS
Playing recorded songs REW :

Select the “Music Box” audio system by using When the (fast forward) or (re-
one of the following methods. wind) button is pushed for more than 1.5 sec-
onds while a track is being played, the track will
● Push the source select switch on the steer-
play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When
ing wheel repeatedly until the center display
the button is released, the track will return to
changes to the Music Box mode. (See
the normal play speed.
“STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CONTROLS
FOR AUDIO” later in this section.) When the or button is pushed for
● Push the AUX·DISC button repeatedly until less than 1.5 seconds while a track is being
the center display changes to the Music Box played, the next track or the beginning of the
mode. current track will be played.
● Give voice commands. (See “INFINITI VOICE The INFINITI controller can also be used to
RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with naviga- select tracks when a track is being played.
tion system)” later in this section.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

췽—

09/02/08—pattie 墍
SAA1684 SAA1685 SAA1686
There are some options available during play- ● Play by Album ● Play by Category
back. Select one of the following that are Plays tracks in each album. The albums are Plays music from one of the following cat-
displayed on the screen, if necessary. sorted in alphabetical order. egories: My Favorites, Hit Songs, Kids’
Menu ● Play by Date Songs and Rarely Played.
Refer to the following information for each item. Plays tracks in each album. The albums are ● Search Artists
● Play by Artist sorted in order of the date when they were Displays a list of artists in alphabetical
stored in the system. order. Selecting an artist displays all of the
Plays songs by an artist whose music is tracks by the artist and starts playing the
currently being played. The artists are sorted ● Play by Mood
first track.
in alphabetical order. Plays music from one of the following
moods: Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow ● Search Albums
Music and Upbeat Music. Displays a list of albums in order of the date
when they were stored in the system. Select-
ing an album displays all of the tracks on the
album and starts playing the first track.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Select the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in ● Edit Albums If titles are not displayed for CDs that have
one of the following order: Rec. (Recorded) Select a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date, been recorded, titles can be acquired using
Date, Name, Release Year, Artist. Name, Released Year and Artist) and edit the one of the following methods:
● Search Song Details details using the keypad displayed on the — Retrieve from HDD
Set the conditions and select the “Start screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN Searches the title using the database in
Song Search ” key to search for a desired (models with navigation system)” earlier in the hard disk.
song that is stored in the system. The con- this section.) — Retrieve from CF
ditions are as follows: ● Music Box System Info. Searches the title from the information
Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast) Displays the following information about the acquired on the Internet. Visit
“Music Box” audio system: www.infiniti.com/music-update for de-
Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s and ’10s tails.
and After) a. Music Box Used / Free Space (Information
about “Saved Album”, “Saved Track” and — Transfer Missing Titles to CF
Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist, Group Transfers the information of the album
and Duo) “Remaining Time” is displayed.)
recorded without titles to a CompactFlash
Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip b. Mood Categories (Number of saved tracks card. Visit
Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues, and their categories (Relaxing Music, www.infiniti.com/music-update for de-
Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age, Lively Music, Slow Music, Upbeat Music tails.
Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World, and Others) are displayed.)
e. Music Box Settings (See “Music Box set-
Classical, Children’s and Other) c. Deleted Items (Information about the de- tings” later in this section.)
● Search Keywords leted tracks is displayed.)
f. CDDB Version (the version of the built-in
Input a search keyword using the keypad d. Search Missing Titles Gracenote Database is displayed.)
displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO USE
TOUCH SCREEN (models with navigation sys-
tem)” earlier in this section.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
The category of the track can also be set to
Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop,
Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues,
Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age,
Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World,
Classical, Children’s and Others.
● Remove Track
Reset the mood setting of a track.
Restoring deleted data
Deleted music data can be restored by perform-
ing the following.
SAA1688 SAA1616
1. Select the “Menu ” key and then the
Text
“Music Box System Info. ” key on the Music Box settings
Refer to the following information for each item. screen. To set up the “Music box” hard-disk drive audio
● Set Mood 2. Select the “Deleted Items ” key and then system to your preferred settings, select the
the “Album/Track ” key. “Menu ” key during playback, “Music Box Sys-
Set the mood category of the track to “Re- tem Info. ” key, and “Music Box Settings ” key
laxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow Music” 3. Select the “Restore Album/Track ” key to
restore the deleted music data. with the INFINITI controller, and then push the
or “Upbeat Music”. ENTER button.
● Delete Track You can also listen to the beginning of each
track that has been deleted by performing the Automatic Recording
Delete the track being played. following.
When this item is turned to ON, the “Music Box”
● Edit Info. 1. Select the “Menu ” key and then the hard-disk audio system automatically starts re-
“Music Box System Info. ” key on the cording when a CD is inserted.
Edit the name of the track being played and
screen.
its artist using the keypad displayed on the Recording Quality
screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN 2. Select the “Deleted Items ” key and then
(models with navigation system)” earlier in the “Play Sample ” key. Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
this section.) kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Title Text Priority disc identification and obtain music-related in- agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights
formation, including name, artist, track, and under this Agreement against you directly in its
Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc Data
title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online own name.
Base) to acquire track information from the
servers (“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform
Gracenote Database or set to CD TEXT to acquire The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique
other functions. You may use Gracenote Data
the information from CDs. identifier to track queries for statistical pur-
only by means of the intended End-User func-
poses. The purpose of a randomly assigned
Delete ALL Music Box Data tions of this device.
numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote
Delete all music data stored on the hard disk. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the MusicID service to count queries without know-
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for ing anything about who you are. For more
Gracenote your own personal non-commercial use only. information, see the web page for the
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote Mu-
NOTE: transmit the Gracenote Software or any sicID Service.
● The information contained in the Gracenote Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Database is not fully guaranteed. NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
● The service of the Gracenote Database on the GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERV-
Gracenote makes no representations or warran-
Internet may be stopped without prior notice ERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
for maintenance. You agree that your non-exclusive license to use of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
violate these restrictions. If your license termi- data categories for any cause that Gracenote
End-User License Agreement nates, you agree to cease any and all use of the deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
THE TERMS BELOW. Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-
rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft- ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninter-
Gracenote姞 MusicID姞 Terms of Use ware, and the Gracenote Servers, including all rupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide
This device contains software from Gracenote, ownership rights. Under no circumstances will you with new enhanced or additional data types
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The Gracenote become liable for any payment to or categories that Gracenote may provide in the
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft- you for any information that you provide. You future and is free to discontinue its online
ware”) enables this application to do online services at any time.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EX- Copyright
PRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-
Music recognition technology and related data
ITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
are provided by Gracenote姞. Gracenote is the
ABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
industry standard in music recognition technol-
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE
ogy and related content delivery. For more
DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
information visit www.gracenote.com.
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
SAA0451
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend- CD/CF (CompactFlash) CARE AND
ing. Some services supplied under license from CLEANING
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks CD
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,
● Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-
marks of Gracenote. surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● A new disc may be rough on the inner and 1. ENTER (models with navigation system) or
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by tuning (models without navigation sys-
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the tem) switch
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. 2. BACK switch
CF cards 3. Volume control switch
● Never touch the terminal portion of the 4. Source select switch
CompactFlash cards. Do not bend the cards.
STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED
● Always place the cards in the storage case CONTROLS FOR AUDIO
when they are not being used.
● Do not place heavy objects on the cards. ENTER (models with navigation
system) or tuning (models without
● Do not store the cards in highly humid SAA1107
locations. navigation system) switch
With navigation system
● Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight. Push the switch upward or downward to select
a station, track, CD or folder when they are
● Do not spill any liquids on the cards. listed on the display.
Refer to the CompactFlash card Owner’s Manual Tune/Track :
for the details.
RADIO
● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter
Next or previous preset station
● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer
Next or previous station

SAA1824
Without navigation system

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
CD iPod姞 (if so equipped) While the display is in the NAVI, STATUS or
Audio setting screen, some audio functions can
● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter ● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter also be controlled using the ENTER switch. The
Next track or the beginning of the current Previous or next track (Start/Pause or Menu function varies depending on if you push the
track can be selected when the ENTER button is switch shorter (less than 1.5 seconds) or longer
pushed.) (more than 1.5 seconds).
● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer
Disc change (When only one disc is loaded, ● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer BACK switch
the 1st track of the disc will be selected.) Rewind or fast forward search
Push this switch to go back to the previous
CD/CF (if so equipped) with MP3/WMA “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system (if so screen or cancel the selection if it is not com-
equipped) pleted.
● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter
Next track or the beginning of the current ● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter Volume control switches
track Next track or the beginning of the current Push the upper (+) or lower (⫺) side switch to
track increase or decrease the volume.
● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer
Folder change (When the last folder on a disc ● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer SOURCE select switch
is playing, the next disc will be selected.) Playlist change (When the last playlist is
Push the source select switch to change the
playing, the next playlist will be selected.)
DVD (if so equipped) mode, Preset A, Preset B, Preset C, “Music Box”
ENTER switch operation : (if so equipped), CD, CompactFlash (if so
● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter equipped), DVD (if so equipped), AUX and iPod姞
You can also use the ENTER switch to select the (if equipped).
Next track/chapter or the beginning of the
items on the usual setting menu screen.
current track/chapter
After selecting an MP3 folder using the up and
● Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer down switch, push the ENTER switch to com-
Next group/title or the beginning of the plete the selection.
current group/title

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
REAR CONTROL SWITCHES FOR AUDIO CD :
(if so equipped) ● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)
The audio system can also be operated using “ ” shorter
the rear controls. Next track or the beginning of the current
Volume control switch track
● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)
Push the “ ” (front) side or “ ” (rear)
side of the switch to adjust the volume. “ ” longer
Disc change (When only one disc is loaded,
“ ” Front side: Volume increases the 1st track of the disc will be selected.)
“ ” Rear side: Volume decreases CD/CF (if so equipped) with MP3/WMA :
Tune/Track switch ● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)
The function varies depending on if you push “ ” shorter
the switch shorter (less than 1.5 seconds) or Next track or the beginning of the current
longer (more than 1.5 seconds). track
RADIO : ● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)
● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front) “ ” longer
“ ” shorter Folder change (When the last folder on a disc
SAA1108 is playing, the next disc will be selected.)
Next or previous preset station
1. Volume control switch
● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front) DVD (if so equipped) :
2. Tune/Track switch
“ ” longer ● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)
3. ON/OFF switch
Next or previous station “ ” shorter
4. Source (SRC) select switch
Next track/chapter or the beginning of the
5. Display
current track/chapter
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front) “ON/OFF” switch
“ ” longer With the ignition switch pushed to the ACC or
Next group/title or the beginning of the ON position, push the “ON/OFF ” switch to turn
current group/title the audio system ON or OFF.

iPod姞 (if so equipped) Source select switch


● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front) Push the “SRC ” select switch to change the
audio mode.
“ ” shorter
Previous or next track (Start/Pause or Menu ANTENNA
can be selected when the ENTER button is Window antenna
pushed.) SIC2773
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front) window.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
“ ” longer
Rewind or fast forward search
CAUTION The auxiliary input jacks are located in the
center console. NTSC compatible devices such
● Do not place metalized film near the rear
“Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system (if so as video games, camcorders and portable video
window glass or attach any metal parts to it.
equipped) players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks.
This may cause poor reception or noise.
● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifi-
”/UP (front) ● When cleaning the inside of the rear window,
cation purposes.
“ ” shorter be careful not to scratch or damage the rear
window antenna. Lightly wipe along the an- ● Yellow - video input
Next track or the beginning of the current tenna with a dampened soft cloth.
track ● White - left channel audio input
● Red - right channel audio input
● Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)
“ ” longer Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the
power of the portable device and the audio
Playlist change (When the last playlist is system.
playing, the next playlist will be selected.)

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
INFINITI MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
(MES) (if so equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with the mobile enter- ● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning the
tainment system, which enables you to play a Mobile Entertainment System components.
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the im- Do not use solvents or cleaning solutions.
ages and sounds both in the front and rear
display screens.
● Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
WARNING temperature conditions [below ⫺4°F
(⫺20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].
● The driver must not attempt to operate or
● To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do
view the Mobile Entertainment System
not operate the system more than 15 min-
(MES) while the vehicle is in motion so that
utes without starting the engine.
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation. Movies will not be shown on the front display
while the vehicle is in any drive position to SAA1109
● Do not attempt to modify the system to dis-
play a movie on the front screen while the reduce driver distraction. Audio is available DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)
vehicle is being driven. Doing so may dis- when a movie is played. To view movies in the SYSTEM COMPONENTS
tract the driver and may cause a collision and front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location,
serious personal injury or death. move the selector lever to the P (Park) position DVD drive
and apply the parking brake. The DVD drive is located inside of the center
console. Insert a DVD into the slot with the label
CAUTION side facing the front passenger’s seat side. The
DVD will be guided automatically into the slot.
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal display
may break if hit with a hard or sharp object. If When ejecting the DVD, push the EJECT button
the glass breaks, do not touch the liquid 䊊1 .
crystalline material, which contains a small
amount of mercury. In case of contact with CAUTION
skin, wash immediately with soap and ● Do not force a DVD into the slot. This could
water. cause damage the player.
● Do not use 8 cm (3.1 in) discs.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
Displays CAUTION
Do not touch the display when it is opening or
WARNING
closing.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the
parking brake to view the images on the front
center display screen using the DVD drive or
other devices connected to the auxiliary input
jacks.

CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal display SAA0719B
may break if hit with a hard or sharp object. If
Flip-down screen (rear)
the glass breaks, do not touch the liquid
crystalline material, which contains a small
amount of mercury. In case of contact with Use the remote controller to operate the motor-
skin, wash immediately with soap and ized flip-down rear display screen.
water. 1. Push the REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE but-
● Use soft, damp cloth when cleaning the Mo- ton on the remote controller to open or
bile Entertainment System components. Do close the display.
not use solvents or cleaning solutions. 2. Adjust the display angle by pushing the
● Be sure to stow the rear display when it is not DISPLAY TILT button or .
used.
The screen can also be opened using the
INFINITI controller. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING
BUTTON” earlier in this section.)
Do not block the range of the wireless remote
controller receiver and wireless headphones
transmitter 䊊1 .

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
If the sound from the headphones is not clear it
may be because:
● of an infrared communication device or cel-
lular phone, turn down the headphone vol-
ume or stop using the headphones, or
● the headphones maybe out of the range of
the transmitter installed in the rear flip-down
display screen. This is not a malfunction, or
● the sound may be interrupted temporarily
when there is an obstacle between the head-
phones and the transmitter. Remove the
SAA0720 SAA0721 obstacle, such as opaque materials, hands,
hair, etc.
Headphones Volume control
Headphones are a wireless type and no cables Turn the volume control knob to adjust the
are necessary. You can use them in almost all volume.
the ranges in the rear seat for listening to the The headphones will automatically be turned
sound from DVD or AUX. (It is not possible to off in about 5 minutes if there is no sound
use the headphones in the front seat.) during that period. To prevent the battery from
Power ON/OFF being discharged, keep the power turned off
when not in use.
Push the POWER button to turn the headphones
on or off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
3. Joystick
4. AUX button
5. ENTER button
6. DISP button
7. VOLUME CONTROL button
( or )
8. Headphones button
9. TRACK/CHANNEL button
( or )
10. DISPLAY TILT button
( or ) SAA0978

11. BACK button Remote controller


12. ASPECT button
13. SOUND button
14. Keypad
See “PLAYING A DVD” later in this section for
the function of each buttons.

SAA1828
Remote controller
The remote controller has the following con-
trols:
1. REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE button SAA0723

2. DVD button Headphones

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Remote controller and headphones ● When changing batteries, do not let dust
CAUTION
battery replacement or oil get on the remote control and
headphones. ● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle en-
Replace the battery as follows: gine is running. Operating the DVD for ex-
FCC Notice tended periods of time with the engine OFF
1. Open the lid. can discharge the vehicle battery.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
2. Replace both batteries with new ones. proved by the party responsible for compliance ● Do not allow the system to get wet. Exces-
● Size AA (remote control) could void the user’s authority to operate the sive moisture such as spilled liquids may
equipment. cause the system to malfunction.
● Size AAA (headphones)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC ● While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD
● Make sure that the 丣 and 䊞 ends on the Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera- player does not guarantee complete func-
batteries match the markings inside the tion is subject to the following two conditions: tionality of all VIDEO-CD formats.
compartment. (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
3. Close the lid securely. ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference that Copyright and trademark
If the battery is removed for any reason other may cause undesired operation of the device.
than replacement, close the lid securely. ● The technology protected by the U.S. patent
BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD MOBILE and other intellectual property rights owned
● If you will not be using the remote control by Macrovision Corporation and other right
for long periods of time, remove the bat- ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
holders is adopted for this system.
teries. Precautions
● This copyright protected technology cannot
● Replacement of the batteries is needed Start the engine when using the DVD entertain- be used without a permit from Macrovision
when the remote control only functions at ment system. Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,
extremely close distances to the MES or
not at all. etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision
WARNING Corporation is not issued.
● Be careful not to touch the battery termi-
nal.
The driver must not attempt to operate the DVD ● Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.
system or wear the headphones while the ve-
● Dolby digital is manufactured under license
● An improperly disposed battery can harm hicle is in motion so that full attention may be
the environment. Always confirm local given to vehicle operation. from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
regulations for battery disposal.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are ● DVD’s with a paper label
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. ● DVD’s that are warped, scratched, or have
● DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ” are unequal edges
registered trademarks of Digital Theater Sys- ● Recordable digital video discs (DVD-R,
tems, Inc. DVD+R)
Parental level (parental control) ● Rewritable digital video discs (DVD-RW,
DVD+RW, DVD-RAM)
DVDs with the parental control setting can be
played with this system. Please use your own Display settings
judgement to set the parental control with the
system. Front display

Disc selection To adjust the front display mode, push the


SETTING button while the DVD is being played,
You can play the following disc formats with the select the “Display ” key with the INFINITI
DVD drive: controller, and then push the ENTER button.
● DVD-VIDEO
To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint,
● DVD-AUDIO color and contrast, select each key using the
● VIDEO-CD INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.
● CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CD with Then you can adjust each item using the
MP3/WMA cannot be played.) LHA0484 INFINITI controller.
Use DVDs with a region code “1”, “ALL” or “1 Do not use the following DVD’s as they may Rear display
included” for your DVD entertainment system. cause the DVD player to malfunction:
To adjust the rear display mode, push the
(The region code is displayed as a small symbol ● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
printed on the top of the DVD.) This vehicle- “DISP” (Display) button on the remote control-
● DVD’s with a region code other than “1”. The ler.
installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a
region code 䊊A is displayed in a small symbol
region code other than “1” or “ALL”.
printed on the top of the DVD 䊊 B

● DVD’s that are not round


4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
To adjust the display brightness, tint, color and and it will turn off automatically after a period of
contrast, select each key using the joystick on time. To turn it on again, push the DISC·AUX
the remote controller and tilt the joystick to button again.
right or left.
DVD operation keys
Push the BACK button to apply the settings and
return to the previous display. To operate the DVD drive, select the desired key
displayed on the operation screen using the
INFINITI controller.
PAUSE
Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER
SAA1829
button to pause the DVD. To resume playing the
DVD, use the “PLAY” key.
Operation screen — DVD AUDIO
To pause the DVD, it is also possible to push the
“ ” button on the keypad of the remote
PLAYING A DVD controller.
DISC·AUX button PLAY
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front ” key and push the ENTER
Select the “
seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while button to start playing the DVD, for example,
watching the images. after pausing the DVD.
Push the DISC·AUX button on the instrument To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to
panel and turn the display to the DVD mode.
push the “ ” button on the keypad of the
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed remote controller.
automatically.
STOP
The operation screen will be turned on when the
DISC·AUX button located on the instrument Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER
panel is pushed while a DVD is being played, button to stop playing the DVD.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to
push the “ ” button on the keypad of the
remote controller.
SKIP (FORWARD)
Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER
button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc for-
ward. The chapters will advance the number of
times the ENTER button is pushed.
To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also pos-
sible to push the “ ” button on the keypad
of the remote controller. SAA1830 SAA1832

SKIP (REWIND) Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-1 Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-3

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER


button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc back-
ward. The chapters will go back the number of
times the ENTER button is pushed.
To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also
possible to push the “ ” button on the
keypad of the remote controller.

SAA1831 SAA1193
Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-2 Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-1

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
DVD settings Surround Information* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-
AUDIO, VIDEO-CD, CD-DA) (Models equipped
Select the “Settings ” key with the INFINITI with BOSE姞 Surround Sound System)
controller and push the ENTER button to adjust
the following settings. Select the “Surround Information ” key and
push the ENTER button. The surround informa-
The items indicated with “*” can also be set tion screen will appear.
from the rear display. Push the “DVD” button on
the remote controller while a DVD is being Push the BACK button to return to the previous
played. Select the preferred item using the screen.
joystick “ ” on the remote controller and Display Mode* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO-
push the ENTER “ ” button. CD)
SAA1194 Menu* (DVD-VIDEO) Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-2 “Cinema” mode using the INFINITI controller
Some menus specific to each disc will be and push the ENTER button again.
shown. For details, see the instructions at-
tached to the disc. Angle* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)
Top Menu* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO) If the DVD contains different angles (such as
moving images), the current image angle can be
Each title menu in the disc will be shown. For switched to another one.
details, see the instructions attached to the
disc. Select the “Angle ” key and push the ENTER
button. When the “+” side or “⫺” side is
Audio* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO-CD) / selected, the angle will change.
Subtitle* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)
Choose the preferred language using the
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button. When this item is turned on, an angle mark will
be shown on the bottom of the screen if the
SAA1195 To turn off the subtitle, push and hold the scene can be seen from a different angle.
Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-3 ENTER button until a beep sounds.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
10 Key Search* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO- Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO) Rear display open/close
CD, CD-DA)
DVD menus are automatically configured and To open or close the flip-down rear display,
Select the “10 Key Search ” key and push the the contents will be played directly when the push the “ ” button.
ENTER button to open the number entry screen. “Menu Skip ” key is turned on. Note that some
discs may not be played directly even if this Joystick
Input the number you want to search for and
item is turned on. Use the joystick “ ” to select the items
select the “OK ” key with the INFINITI controller.
Then push the ENTER button. The specified DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO- displayed on the rear screen.
Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played. CD) ENTER button
Title Search* (DVD-VIDEO) Select the “DVD Language ” key and push the
ENTER button to open the number entry screen. Push the ENTER “ ” button to make the
The scene with the specified title will be dis- selected item complete on the rear screen.
played the number of times the “+” side or “⫺” Input the number corresponding to the pre-
side is selected. ferred language and select the “OK ” key with BACK button
the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER Push to go back to the previous screen or cancel
Group Search* (DVD-AUDIO)
button. The DVD top menu language will be the selection.
The scene with the specified group will be changed to the one specified.
displayed the number of times the “+” or “⫺” Display tilt
DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)
side is selected. Adjust the display angle by pushing the DIS-
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows you PLAY TILT button “ ”.
Select No.* (VIDEO-CD)
to tune the dynamic range of the sound re-
Select the “Select No. ” key and push the ENTER corded in the Dolby Digital format. DVD mode
button to open the number entry screen. To select the DVD mode, push the DVD button.
DOWN MIX (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)
Input the number you wish to search for and AUX mode
Convert a multi-channel recording to a tradi-
select the “OK ” key with the INFINITI controller, tional two-channel (stereo) recording.
and then push the ENTER button. The specified To select the AUX (auxiliary input jacks), mode,
scene will be played. Remote controller operation push the AUX button.
Use the remote controller to adjust the follow-
ing items.
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Volume Track/Channel ● Do not attempt to operate the system in
extreme humidity conditions (less than 10%
To control the volume level, push the VOL To skip to the previous or next DVD scene or more than 75%).
button “ ”. selection, push the TRACK CH button
“ ”. CAUTION
Display
Keypad ● Do not use any solvents or cleaning solu-
To adjust the rear display screen (brightness,
tions when cleaning the video system.
tint, contrast, etc.), push the DISP button. : PLAY/PAUSE button
● Do not use excessive force on the monitor
Aspect screen.
: STOP button
To change the display size, push the ASPECT ● Avoid touching or scratching the monitor
button. Each time the button is pushed, the : FORWARD button
screen as it may become dirty or damaged.
display size will change to “Cinema”, “Wide”,
: REWIND button
“Full” or “Normal”.
Sound : FORWARD button for still images (for
DVD-AUDIO)
To change the language, push the SOUND but-
ton. Each time the button is pushed, the lan- : REWIND button for still images (for
guage will change to each language stored in DVD-AUDIO)
the DVD.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Headphones
Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean
The DVD sound can be heard through the
the surfaces of your Mobile Entertainment Sys-
headphones.
tem. (DVD player face, screen, remote control-
Push the headphones “ ” button. Each ler, etc.)
time the button is pushed, the headphones ● Do not attempt to operate the system in
mode will switch to ON or OFF. extreme temperature conditions [below
To control the volume of sound from the head- ⫺4°F (⫺20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)].
phones, use the volume control knob attached
to the headphones.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in


● Never attempt to use a DVD that has been
cracked, deformed, or repaired using adhe- your INFINITI, be sure to observe the following
sive. Doing so may cause damage to the cautions, otherwise the new equipment may
equipment. adversely affect the electronic control modules
and electronic control system harness.
● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami- WARNING
nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not
be read properly. ● A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be given
● Do not write, draw or attach anything on any
to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions pro-
side of the DVD.
hibit the use of cellular telephones while
● Do not store the DVD in locations with direct driving.
SAA0451 sunlight or in high temperatures or humid-
● If you must make a call while your vehicle is
How to handle the DVD ity.
in motion, the hands-free cellular phone op-
● Always place discs in the storage case when erational mode (if so equipped) is highly rec-
CAUTION they are not being used. ommended. Exercise extreme caution at all
● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch the ● Do not put on any sticker or write anything times so full attention may be given to ve-
surface of the disc. on either surface of the DVD. hicle operation.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the ● If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular location and stop your vehicle before doing
motion. so.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner,


benzine, thinner or alcohol intended for in- CAUTION
dustrial use.
● Keep the antenna as far away as possible
● A new disc may be rough on its inner and from the electronic control modules.
outer edges. Remove the rough edges using
the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
BLUETOOTH姞 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

phone module when the ignition switch is


● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) WARNING
pushed to the ON position with the registered
away from the electronic control system har-
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a cellular phone turned on and carried in the
ness. Do not route the antenna wire next to
safe location. If you have to use a phone vehicle.
any harness.
while driving, exercise extreme caution at all
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as times so full attention may be given to ve- You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth姞
recommended by the manufacturer. hicle operation. cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular
● Connect the ground wire from the CB radio ● If you find yourself unable to devote full at- phone at a time.
chassis to the body. tention to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe location The INFINITI Voice Recognition system supports
● For details, consult an INFINITI dealer. the phone commands, so dialing a phone num-
and stop your vehicle before doing so.
ber using your voice is possible. For more
details, see “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYS-
TEM (models with navigation system)” later in
CAUTION
this section; page 4-99.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a
Before using the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone
phone after starting the engine.
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth姞 compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner phone module before using the Bluetooth姞
of a compatible Bluetooth姞 enabled cellular Hands-Free Phone System.
phone, you can set up the wireless connection
● Some Bluetooth姞 enabled cellular phones
between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. With Bluetooth姞 wireless tech-
phone module. Please visit
nology, you can make or receive a telephone
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a recom-
call with your cellular phone in your pocket.
mended phone list.
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-
vehicle phone module, no phone connecting
procedure is required anymore. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

췽—

06/10/08—pattie 墍
● You will not be able to use a hands-free ● If the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System REGULATORY INFORMATION
phone under the following conditions: seems to be malfunctioning, please visit FCC Regulatory information
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for trouble-
– Your vehicle is outside of the telephone shooting help. – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s
service area. RF exposure guidelines, use only the sup-
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is plied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modi-
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
difficult to receive radio waves; such as in fication, or attachments could damage the
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
a tunnel, in an underground parking ga- transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
ing the device in a different location may
rage, behind a tall building or in a moun- reduce or eliminate the noise. – Operation is subject to the following two
tainous area. conditions:
● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
– Your cellular phone is locked in order not regarding the telephone pairing procedure 1) this device may not cause interference
to be dialed. specific to your phone, battery charging, and
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal cellular phone antenna, etc. 2) this device must accept any interference,
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be ● The antenna display on the monitor will not including interference that may cause un-
difficult to hear the other person’s voice coincide with the antenna display of some desired operation of the device
during a call. cellular phones.
IC Regulatory information
● Immediately after the ignition switch is ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
pushed to the ON position, it may be impos- possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as – Operation is subject to the following two
sible to receive a call for a short period of well as to minimize its echoes. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
time. interference, and (2) this device must accept
● If reception between callers is unclear, ad- any interference, including interference that
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area justing the incoming or outgoing call volume may cause undesired operation of the device.
surrounded by metal or far away from the may improve the clarity.
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone – This Class B digital apparatus meets all
quality degradation and wireless connection requirements of the Canadian Interference-
disruption. Causing Equipment Regulations.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth姞 wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual.
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Bluetooth trademark: CONTROL BUTTONS
1) PHONE button
BLUETOOTH姞 is a trade- 2) TALK/PHONE SEND button
mark owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc., U.S.A.
VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System features
using the INFINITI Voice Recognition system.
For more details, see “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNI-
TION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)”
later in this section; page 4-99.

SAA1825

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
SAA1895 SAA1572 SAA1925
PAIRING PROCEDURE 2. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the 3. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
name list of the phones, and push the operate the Bluetooth姞 cellular phone to
1. Push the PHONE button or push and hold
ENTER button. enter the PIN code.
the button, and select the “Pair
phone” key on the display using the The pairing procedure of the cellular phone
INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER varies according to each cellular phone. See
button. the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for the
details. You can also visit
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth or call INFINITI
Consumer Affairs Department for instruc-
tions on pairing INFINITI recommended cel-
lular phones.
When the pairing is completed, the screen
will return to the Bluetooth姞 setup display.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SAA1574 SAA1575 SAA1576
PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION 4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key, 6. After the memory is registered in the
and push the ENTER button in order to phonebook, the system will ask if you
Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the register your cellular phone memory in want to add a voicetag for it. If you want
phonebook. the phonebook. to add a voicetag, select the “YES” key on
1. Push the SETTING button, and select the 5. Operate the cellular phone to send a the “Add a voicetag?” screen. For ex-
“PHONE” key on the display using the person’s name and phone number from ample, if the partner’s name is David,
INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER the memory of the cellular phone. The speak “David” after a tone. The “David”
button. memory sending procedure from the cel- voicetag is stored in the phonebook. Voic-
2. Select the “Phonebook” key, and push lular phone varies according to each cel- etags allow easy dialing using the INFINITI
the ENTER button. lular phone manufacturer. See the cellular Voice Recognition system. (See “INFINITI
3. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the phone Owner’s Manual for more details. VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models
name list of the phonebook, and push the with navigation system)” later in this sec-
ENTER button. tion; page 4-99.)
7. When the phonebook registration is com-
pleted, the screen will return to the name
list of the phonebook.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
● To confirm the stored voicetags, select the – Copy from Outgoing Call Logs
“Voicetag Directory” key using the INFINITI Store the name and phone number from
controller, and push the ENTER button. the outgoing call list.
● There are different methods to input a phone
– Copy from Incoming Call Logs
number. Select one of the following options
instead of “Transfer via Bluetooth” in step 4 Store the name and phone number from
above. the incoming call list.
– Enter Data by Keypad – Delete
Input the name and phone number manu- Delete a contact that is registered in the
ally using the keypad displayed on the phonebook.
screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH
SCREEN (models with navigation system)” SAA1895
earlier in this section.)
MAKING A CALL
– Copy from Downloaded Phonebook
To make a call, follow the procedures below.
Copy a phonebook from the Bluetooth姞
1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument
cellular phone. The availability of this
function depends on each cellular phone. panel or push and hold the button
The copying procedure from the cellular on the steering wheel. The “PHONE”
phone also varies according to each cel- screen will appear on the display.
lular phone. See cellular phone Owner’s 2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the
Manual for more details. “PHONE” menu, and push the ENTER but-
ton.
3. Select the registered person’s name from
the list, and push the ENTER button. Dial-
ing will start and the screen will change to
the call-in-progress screen.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
4. After the call is over, perform one of the ● Answer
following to finish the call. Accept an incoming call to talk.
a. Select the “Hang up” key and push the ● On Hold
ENTER button.
Put an incoming call on hold.
b. Push the button on the steering ● Reject Call
wheel.
Reject an incoming call.
c. Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel. To finish the call, perform one of the follow-
ing procedures listed below.
There are different methods to make a call.
a) Select the “Hang up” key on the display
Select one of the following options instead of
and push the ENTER button.
“Call (Phonebook)” in step 2 above. SAA1578
b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument
● Redial RECEIVING A CALL panel.
Dial the previously dialed number again.
When you hear a phone ring, the display will c) Push the button on the steering
● Call (Call Logs) change to the incoming call mode. To receive a wheel.
Select the name or phone number from the call, perform one of the following procedures
incoming or outgoing call logs. listed below.
● Call (Downloaded) a) Select the “Answer” key on the display
and push the ENTER button.
Select the name or phone number from the
downloaded list. b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
● Dial (Keypad)
c) Push the button on the steering
Input the phone number manually using the
keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW wheel.
TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with naviga- There are some options available when receiv-
tion system)” earlier in this section.) ing a call. Select one of the following displayed
on the screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
● Keypad
Send a dial tone to the caller for using
network services such as voice mail.
● Cancel Mute
This will appear after “Mute” is selected.
Mute will be canceled.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or ⫺)
on the steering wheel or turn the volume control
knob on the instrument panel while talking on
the phone. This adjustment is also available in
SAA1579 the SETTING mode. SAA1580
DURING A CALL PHONE SETTING
There are some options available during a call. To set up the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone
Select one of the following displayed on the System to your preferred settings, push the
screen if necessary. SETTING button on the instrument panel and
● Hang up select the “PHONE” key on the display, and
then push the ENTER button.
Finish the call.
Phonebook
● Use Handset
Transfer the call to the cellular phone. See “PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION” earlier in
this section for adding, editing and deleting a
● Mute contact.
Mute your voice to the person.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phonebook ● Pair Phone
Delete an entry from the downloaded phone- See “PAIRING PROCEDURE” later in this sec-
book. tion.
Automatic Hold ● Priority Change

If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be Use this command to change the priority
placed on hold automatically after several level of the active phone.
rings. The priority level determines which phone
will be connected to the system when more
Use Vehicle Ringtone than one paired Bluetooth姞 phone is in the
If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that vehicle.
SAA1581 is different from the cellular phone’s will sound The system states the priority level of the
when receiving a call. active phone and asks for a new priority
Downloaded Phonebook
Delete Call Logs level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).
Refer to the following information for each item.
If the new priority level is already being used
● Download All Delete all of the incoming or outgoing call logs for another phone, the two phones will swap
from the list. priority levels.
Download all of the contacts registered in
the Bluetooth姞 cellular phone. Availability of Bluetooth Setup For example, if the current priority levels are:
this function depends on each cellular Priority Level 1 = Phone A
See the following information for each item.
phone. The memory downloading procedure Priority Level 2 = Phone B
from the cellular phone also varies accord- ● Bluetooth Priority Level 3 = Phone C
ing to each cellular phone. See cellular If this setting is turned off, the connection and you change the priority level of Phone C
phone Owner’s Manual for more details. between the cellular phone and the in- to Level 1, then:
● Delete Downloaded Phonebook vehicle phone module will be canceled. Priority Level 1 = Phone C
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Delete a downloaded phonebook. ● Bluetooth Info Priority Level 3 = Phone A
Check information about the device name,
device PIN and connection status.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Remove Paired Phone
Delete a registered cellular phone from the
paired list.
● Paired Phone List
Up to 5 registered cellular phones are shown
on the list. If you select a cellular phone that
is different from the one currently being
connected, the newly selected phone will be
connected to the system.
● Edit Phone Name
Rename the registered cellular phones using
the keypad displayed on the screen. (See
“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with
navigation system)” earlier in this section.)

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)”
later in this section; page 4-99.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
System fails to interpret the com- 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the
mand correctly. vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is
too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION” ear-
The system consistently selects the lier in this section.)
wrong voicetag.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

췽—

05/28/08—pattie 墍
BLUETOOTH姞 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

phone module when the ignition switch is – Your vehicle is in an area where it is
WARNING
pushed to the ON position with the registered difficult to receive radio waves; such as in
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a cellular phone turned on and carried in the a tunnel, in an underground parking ga-
safe location. If you have to use a phone vehicle. rage, behind a tall building or in a moun-
while driving, exercise extreme caution at all tainous area.
times so full attention may be given to ve- You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth姞
hicle operation. cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module. – Your cellular phone is locked in order not
However, you can talk on only one cellular to be dialed.
● If you find yourself unable to devote full at-
phone at a time. ● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
tention to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe location The INFINITI Voice Recognition system supports or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
and stop your vehicle before doing so. the phone commands, so dialing a phone num- difficult to hear the other person’s voice
ber using your voice is possible. during a call.
Before using the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone ● Immediately after the ignition switch is
CAUTION pushed to the ON position, it may be impos-
System, refer to the following notes.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a sible to receive a call for a short period of
phone after starting the engine. ● Set up the wireless connection between a time.
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the Bluetooth姞 ● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System. surrounded by metal or far away from the
Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
● Some Bluetooth姞 enabled cellular phones quality degradation and wireless connection
of a compatible Bluetooth姞 enabled cellular
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle disruption.
phone, you can set up the wireless connection
phone module. Please visit
between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a recom- ● While a cellular phone is connected through
phone module. With Bluetooth姞 wireless tech- the Bluetooth姞 wireless connection, the bat-
nology, you can make or receive a telephone mended phone list.
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
call with your cellular phone in your pocket. ● You will not be able to use a hands-free charge quicker than usual.
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in- phone under the following conditions: ● If the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System
vehicle phone module, no phone connecting – Your vehicle is outside of the telephone seems to be malfunctioning, please visit
procedure is required anymore. Your phone is service area. www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for trouble-
automatically connected with the in-vehicle shooting help.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Some cellular phones or other devices may 1. this device may not cause interference pletes, the system will announce “Hands-free
cause interference or a buzzing noise to and phone system not ready” and will not react to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor- 2. this device must accept any interference, voice commands.
ing the device in a different location may including interference that may cause un-
reduce or eliminate the noise. OPERATING TIPS
desired operation of the device
● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual To get the best performance out of the INFINITI
regarding the telephone pairing procedure
IC Regulatory information Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-
specific to your phone, battery charging, – Operation is subject to the following two ing:
cellular phone antenna, etc. conditions: (1) this device may not cause ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
● The antenna display on the monitor will not interference, and (2) this device must accept possible. Close the windows to eliminate
coincide with the antenna display of some any interference, including interference that surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
cellular phones. may cause undesired operation of the device. sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as – This Class B digital apparatus meets all from recognizing voice commands correctly.
possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as requirements of the Canadian Interference- ● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
well as to minimize its echoes. Causing Equipment Regulations. command. Otherwise, the command will not
● If reception between callers is unclear, ad- Bluetooth trademark:
be received properly.
justing the incoming or outgoing call volume ● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
may improve the clarity. after the tone sounds.
BLUETOOTH姞 is a trade-
REGULATORY INFORMATION mark owned by Bluetooth ● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
FCC Regulatory information SIG, Inc., U.S.A. between words.

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s INITIALIZATION GIVING VOICE COMMANDS


RF exposure guidelines, use only the sup- To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition, push and
plied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modi- When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
fication, or attachments could damage the position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initial- release the button located on the steer-
transmitter and may violate FCC regulations. ized, which takes a few seconds. If the ing wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
button is pushed before the initialization com- command.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
The command given is picked up by the micro- NOTE: ● Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The
phone, and voice feedback is given when the system will prompt you to continuing enter-
The voice command “Help” is available at any
command is accepted. ing digits, if desired.
time. Please say “Help” to obtain the informa-
● If you need to hear the available commands tion about how to use the INFINITI Voice Recog- Example: 1-800-662-6200
for the current menu again, say “Help” and nition system. —“One eight zero zero”
the system will repeat them.
How to say numbers The system repeats the numbers and
● If a command is not recognized, the system prompts you to enter more.
announces, “Command not recognized. INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a way to speak numbers in voice commands. —“six six two”
clear voice. Refer to the rules and examples below. The system repeats the numbers and
● If you want to go back to the previous ● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. prompts you to enter more.
command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor- Example: 1-800-662-6200 —“six two zero zero”
rection” anytime the system is waiting for a
response. —“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh ● You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at
oh”, or in any position of the phone number (Avail-
● You can cancel a command when the system able only when using the ⬙Call International⬙
is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” —“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
command.)
or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” oh”
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
and ends the Voice Recognition (VR) session. ● Words can be used for the first 4 digits
You can also push the button on the places only. —“One five five five one two one two star
steering wheel at any time. Whenever the VR one two three”
Example: 1-800-662-6200
session is canceled, a double beep is played
to indicate you have exited the system. —“One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the volume control switches —NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
(+ or ⫺) on the steering wheel while being two hundred, and
provided with feedback. You can also use —NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
the radio volume control knob. hundred.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
NOTE: PHONE END
For best results, say phone numbers as single
Push the button to cancel a VR session
digits.
or end a call.
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone
System with INFINITI Voice Recognition. For
additional command options, see “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

SAA1827 CHOOSING A LANGUAGE


CONTROL BUTTONS You can interact with the Bluetooth姞 Hands-
Free Phone System using English, French or
The control buttons for the Bluetooth姞 Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering Spanish.
wheel. See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” earlier in
this section to change the language.
TALK/PHONE SEND
Push the button to initiate a VR ses-
sion or answer an incoming call.
You can also use the button to skip
through system feedback and to enter com-
mands during a call. (See “LIST OF VOICE
COMMANDS” later in this section and “DUR-
ING A CALL” later in this section for more
information.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
PAIRING PROCEDURE 4. Say: “New phone” 䊊 C . The system ac- 6. The system asks you to assign a priority
knowledges the command and asks you level 䊊 F . The priority level determines
to initiate pairing from the phone handset which phone is active when more than
䊊D . one paired Bluetooth姞 phone is in the
vehicle. Follow the instructions provided
When you are asked to enter a Pass Key for
by the system or see “SETUP” later in this
pairing your Bluetooth姞 cellular phone, op-
section for more information on changing
erate it to enter the code “1234”.
priorities.
The code is always “1234” regardless of the 7. The system will ask if you would like to
number of phones paired. select a custom ringtone 䊊 G . Follow the
The pairing procedure of the cellular phone instructions provided by the system or
varies according to each cellular phone. See see “SETUP” later in this section for more
1. Push the button on the steering the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for de- information on selecting ringtones.
wheel. The system announces the avail- tails. You can also visit
able commands.
MAKING A CALL BY ENTERING A
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for instructions
PHONE NUMBER
2. Say: “Setup” 䊊 A . The system acknowl- on pairing INFINITI recommended cellular
edges the command and announces the phones.
next set of available commands. 5. The system asks you to say a name for the
3. Say: “Pair phone” 䊊 B . The system ac- phone 䊊 E .
knowledges the command and announces If the name is too long or too short, the
the next set of available commands. system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again. 1. Push the button on steering wheel.
Also, if more than one phone is paired and A tone will sound.
the name sounds too much like a name 2. Say: “Call” 䊊A . The system acknowledges
already used, the system tells you, then the command and announces the next set
prompts you for a name again. of available commands.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
3. Say the number you wish to call, starting RECEIVING A CALL
with the area code in the single digit
format 䊊 B . For better recognition results, When you hear the ringtone, press the
it is recommended to say the numbers in button on the steering wheel.
small groups like, the 3-digits area code,
the next 3 digits, then the last 4 digits. For Once the call has ended, press the
example, 555-121-3354 can be said as button on the steering wheel.
“five five five” (1st group), “one two one”
(2nd group) and “three three five four” NOTE:
(3rd group). (See “How to say numbers” If you do not wish to take the call when you hear
earlier in this section for more the ringtone, press the button on the
information.) steering wheel to reject the call.
Say: ⬙Call International⬙ to dial more than For additional command options, see “LIST OF SAA1926
10 digits or any special characters. VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section. LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
4. When you have finished speaking the
phone number, the system repeats it back When you push and release the button
and announces the available commands. on the steering wheel, you can choose from the
5. Say: “Dial” 䊊C . The system acknowledges commands on the Main Menu. The following
the command and makes the call. pages describe these commands and the com-
mands in each sub-menu.
For additional command options, see “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section. Remember to wait for the tone before speaking.
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands
currently available anytime the system is wait-
ing for a response.
If you want to end an action without completing
it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time
while the system is waiting for a response. The
system will end the VR session. Whenever the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

췽—

09/02/08—pattie 墍
VR session is canceled, a double beep is played Once you have confirmed the name and loca-
to indicate you have exited the system. tion, the system begins the call.
If you want to go back to the previous com- <Number> (speak digits)
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correction”
anytime the system is waiting for a response. When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. (See “How to say numbers”
When you get used to the menus in the system, earlier in this section and “MAKING A CALL BY
you can talk ahead by saying more than one ENTERING A PHONE NUMBER” earlier in this
command at a time. For example, say, “Call five section for more details.)
five five one two one two” or “Memo pad
record.” “Redial”
Also, when you get used to the system re- Use the Redial command to call the last number
sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by SAA1927 that was dialed within the vehicle.
pressing the button on the steering CALL
wheel. However, if you press the button NOTE:
when the system is waiting for a response from <Name> (speak name)
The system will not redial the last number dialed
you it will end the VR session. If you have stored entries in the Phonebook, by the handset keypad.
you can dial a number associated with a name
The system acknowledges the command, re-
and location.
peats the number and begins dialing.
See “PHONEBOOK” later in this section to learn
If a redial number does not exist, the system
how to store entries.
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
When prompted by the system, say the name of ends the VR session.
the phonebook entry you wish to call. The
“Callback”
system acknowledges the name.
Use the Call Back command to dial the number
If there are multiple locations associated with
of the last incoming call within the vehicle.
the name, the system asks you to choose the
location. The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing. If a call
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
back number does not exist, the system an- The system acknowledges the command and
nounces, “There is no number to call back” and sends the tones associated with the num-
ends the VR session. bers. The system then ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
International
● “Transfer Call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special mand to transfer the call from the
characters, please say ⬙International⬙. When the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System to the
system acknowledges the command, the sys- cellular phone when privacy is desired.
tem will prompt you to speak the number. The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
DURING A CALL transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
During a call there are several command op-
You can also issue the Transfer Call com- SAA1928
tions available. Press the button on the mand again to return to a hands-free call
steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and through the vehicle. PHONEBOOK
enter commands.
● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute The Phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
● “Help” — The system announces the avail- your voice so the other party cannot hear it. phone paired with the system. Each name can
able commands. Use the mute command again to unmute have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-
your voice. ated with it.
● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session and NOTE:
returns to the call. NOTE:
If the other party ends the call or the cellular Each phone has its own separate phonebook.
● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
phone network connection is lost while the Mute You cannot access Phone A’s phone book if you
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns to
feature is on, the Mute feature may need to be are currently connected with Phone B.
the call.
reset to “off.”
● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send “New Entry”
command to enter numbers during a call. For
example, if you were directed to dial an Use the New Entry command to store a new
extension by an automated system: name in the system.
Say: “Send one two three four.”
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

췽—

08/12/08—pattie 墍
When prompted by the system, say the name contact phone number will be transferred from The system acknowledges the location.
you would like to give the new entry. the cellular phone via the Bluetooth姞 commu-
The system will ask you to say a phone number
nication link.
For example, say: “Mary.” or to transfer a phone number stored in the
The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone’s memory.
If the name is too long or too short, the system
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
tells you, then prompts you for a name again. To enter a phone number by voice command:
Manual for details. You can also visit
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for instructions on For example, say: “five five five one two one
already stored, the system tells you, then transferring phone numbers from INFINITI rec- two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this
prompts you for a name again. ommended cellular phones. section for more information.)
Once the system accepts the name and you The system repeats the number and prompts To transfer a phone number stored in the
confirm it is correct, the system asks for a you for the next command. When you have cellular phone’s memory (if so equipped):
location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other). finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
For example, say: “Home.” The system confirms the name, location and the command and asks you to initiate the
number. The system then asks if you would like transfer from the phone handset. The new
The system acknowledges the location.
to store another location for the same name. If contact phone number will be transferred from
The system will ask you to say a phone number you do not wish to store another location, the the cellular phone via the Bluetooth姞 commu-
or to transfer a phone number stored in the system ends the VR session. nication link.
cellular phone’s memory.
“Edit” The transfer procedure varies according to each
To enter a phone number by voice command: cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Use the Edit command to alter an existing
For example, say: “five five five one two one Manual for details. You can also visit
phonebook entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th
two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for instructions on
phone number to an existing entry.
section for more information.) transferring phone numbers from INFINITI rec-
When prompted by the system, say the name of ommended cellular phones.
To transfer a phone number stored in the the entry you wish to edit.
cellular phone’s memory (if so equipped): The system repeats the number and prompts
The system acknowledges the name and asks you for the next command. When you have
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
you for the location you would like to edit. finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”
the command and asks you to initiate the
transfer from the phone handset. The new Say the name of the location.
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
The system confirms the name, location and “List Names”
number, then announces that the entry has
Use the List Names command to hear all the
been stored. The system then ends the VR
names and locations in the phonebook.
session.
The system recites the phonebook entries but
“Delete”
does not include the actual phone numbers.
Use the Delete command to erase one entry When the playback of the list is complete the
from the phonebook, all entries from the phone- system ends the VR session.
book, the current redial number or the current
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
call back number.
by pressing the button on the steering
To delete entries from the phonebook, say a wheel. The system ends the VR session.
name or “All entries” when prompted by the
system. SAA1929

The system acknowledges the command and MEMO PAD


asks you to confirm the deletion. The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice
To delete the current redial number or call back memos, each up to 20 seconds long.
number, say “redial number” or “call back “Play”
number” when prompted by the system.
The system plays back all the memos in the
If a redial number or a call back number exists, order of newest to oldest. The system ends the
the system deletes them without asking for VR session.
confirmation.
If there are no memos recorded, the system
If there is no number for the entry you are trying announces “No messages to play.” The system
to delete, the system says so and ends the VR ends the VR session.
session.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
“Record” Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair
a sixth phone, the system announces that you
The system announces “Recording” and a tone
sounds signaling you to begin. must first delete one phone or replace an
existing phone.
Speak the information you wish to record
If you try to pair a phone that has already been
clearly. When you are done, press the or
paired to your vehicle’s system, the system
button on the steering wheel. announces the name the phone is already us-
A tone sounds and the system announces ing. The pairing procedure will then be can-
“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end celed.
the VR session.
When prompted by the system, choose from the
If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you following commands:
wish to record over the oldest memo. SAA1930
● “New phone” — see “PAIRING PROCEDURE”
“Delete” SETUP earlier in this section.
The Delete command erases all memos. The Use the Setup command to change options ● “Replace phone” — The system announces
system asks you to confirm this action before associated with the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free the names of the phones already paired and
deleting all memos. Phone System. asks which you would like to replace.
“Pair Phone” Once you say the name of the phone you
wish to replace, the paring procedure will
Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to begin. (See “PAIRING PROCEDURE” earlier in
the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System. this section.)
When you are asked to enter a PIN code for ● “List phone” — See the description below.
pairing your Bluetooth姞 cellular phone, operate “List Phones”
it to enter the code “1234”.
Use the List Phone command to hear the names
The code is always “1234” regardless of the of the phones currently paired. If no phones are
number of phones paired. paired, the system announces, “No paired
phones to list.” The system then ends the VR
session.
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
“Select Phone” For example, if the current priority levels are: SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Use the Select Phone command to select a Priority Level 1 = Phone A Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of
phone of lesser priority when two or more Priority Level 2 = Phone B dialect users to train the system to improve
phones paired with Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Priority Level 3 = Phone C recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
Phone System are in the vehicle at the same commands, the users can create a voice model
and you change the priority level of Phone C to
time.
Level 1, then: of their own voice that is stored in the system.
The system asks you to name the phone and The system is capable of storing a different
Priority Level 1 = Phone C
confirm the selection. speaker adaptation model for memory A and
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Once the selection is confirmed, the selected Priority Level 3 = Phone A memory B.
phone remains active until the ignition switch is If memory A is available, the system will use
“Delete Phone”
pushed to the LOCK position or you select a new memory A to store the model. If memory A is in
phone. Use the Delete Phone command to delete a use and memory B is available, the system will
specific phone or all phones from the use memory B to store the model. If both of the
“Change Priority”
Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System. memory locations are in use, the system will
Use the Change Priority command to change the ask the user to select which memory location
The system announces the names of the phones
priority level of the active phone. should be overwritten.
already paired with the system and their priority
The priority level determines which phone is level. The system then gives you the option to
active when more than one paired Bluetooth姞 delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to Training procedure
phone is in the vehicle. the list again. The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
The system states the priority level of the active Once you chose to delete a phone or all phones, 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, the system asks you to confirm this action. outdoor location.
4, 5).
NOTE: 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
If the new priority level is already being used for running, the parking brake on, and the
another phone, the two phones will swap prior- When you delete a phone, the associated phone- transmission in Park.
ity levels. book for that phone will also be deleted.
3. Press and hold the button for more
than 5 seconds.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE The SA mode will stop if: ● Yes
SEND ( ) button for the hands-free ● The button is pressed for more than 5 ● No
phone system to enter the speaker adap- seconds in SA mode.
tation mode.” ● select ringtone
● The vehicle is driven during SA mode. ● dial eight five six nine two
5. Press the button.
● The ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK ● Bluetooth on
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected position.
automatically. If both memory locations ● setup change priority
are already in use, the system will prompt Training phrases
you to overwrite one. Follow the instruc- ● call three one nine oh two
tions provided by the system. During the SA mode, the system instructs you to
say the following phrases. ● nine seven pause pause three oh eight
7. When preparation is complete and you are ● Cancel
ready to begin, the press the but- (The system will prompt you for each phrase.)
ton. ● phonebook new entry ● call back number
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the ● dial three oh four two nine ● call star two zero nine five
instructions provided by the system. ● delete phone
● delete call back number
9. When training is finished, the system will
● setup pair phone ● dial eight three zero five one
tell you an adequate number of phrases
have been recorded. ● memo pad play ● Home
10. The system will ask you to say your ● eight pause nine three two pause seven ● four three pause two nine pause zero
name. Follow the instructions to register ● delete redial number
your name. ● delete all entries
● call seven two four zero nine ● phonebook list names
11. The system will announce that speaker
adaptation has been completed and the ● phonebook delete entry ● call eight oh five four one
system is ready. ● Correction
● memo pad record
● dial star two one seven oh ● setup change ringtone
● dial seven four oh one eight
● setup main menu
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Delete
● dial nine seven two six six
● memo pad delete
● call seven six three oh one
● go back
● call five six two eight zero
● dial six six four three seven

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the
vehicle.
System fails to interpret the com-
mand correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is
too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to
improve the recognition response for the speaker. (See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this section.)
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the “List
The system consistently selects the Names” command. (See “PHONEBOOK” earlier in this section.)
wrong voicetag.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
(models with navigation system)

INFINITI Voice Recognition allows hands-free For U.S. customers, the Standard Mode is se- INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION
operation of the systems equipped on this lected by default. For Canadian customers, the STANDARD MODE
vehicle in one of two modes, Standard Mode or Alternate Command Mode is the default mode.
Alternate Command Mode. To switch one mode to another, see each mode The following section is applicable when the
description later in this section. Standard Mode is activated. (This mode is
In Standard Mode, commands that are available selected by default for U.S. customers.)
are always shown on the display and an- To improve the recognition success rate when
nounced by the system. You can complete your Alternate Command Mode is active, try using The Standard Mode enables you to complete
desired operation by simply following the the Speaker Adaptation Function available in the desired operation by simply following the
that mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that prompts that appear on the display and also are
prompts given by the system. (See “INFINITI
Alternate Command Mode be turned off and announced by the system. Hands-free operation
VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE” later in
Standard Mode be used for the best recognition of Audio, Climate Control and Display systems
this section for details.) In this mode, hands- is not available in this mode.
performance.
free operation of Audio, Climate Control and
Display is not available through INFINITI Voice For the voice commands for the navigation
Recognition. system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s
Manual of your vehicle.
For advanced operation, you can use the Alter-
nate Command Mode that enables the opera-
tion of the display, audio, and climate control
through INFINITI Voice Recognition. (See
“INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COM-
MAND MODE” later in this section for details.)
When this mode is active, an expanded list of
commands can be spoken after pushing the
TALK switch, and the voice command
menu prompts are turned off. Note that in this
mode the recognition success rate may be
affected as the number of available commands
and the ways of speaking each command are
increased.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SAA1815 SAA1917 SAA2164
Activating Standard Mode 4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
key and push the ENTER button. panel.
When the Alternate Command Mode is active,
perform the following steps to switch to the 5. The indicator turns off and the Standard 2. Highlight the “Others” key using the
Standard Mode. Mode activates. INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
Displaying user guide button.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel. 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key us-
If you use the INFINITI Voice Recognition system ing the INFINITI controller and push the
2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display for the first time or you do not know how to
and then push the ENTER button. ENTER button.
operate it, you can display the User Guide for
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and confirmation. 4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the
then push the ENTER button. INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
You can confirm how to use voice commands by button.
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several 5. Highlight an item using the INFINITI con-
voice commands. troller and push the ENTER button.
You can skip steps 1 to 3 above if you say
“Help”.
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Available items:
● Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
INFINITI Voice Recognition system.
● Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
● Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
address.
SAA1904 SAA2165
● Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct Getting Started Useful tips for correct operation
command recognition by the system. Before using the INFINITI Voice Recognition You can display useful speaking tips to help the
● Voice Recognition Settings system for the first time, you can confirm how to system recognize your voice commands cor-
use commands by viewing the Getting Started rectly.
Describes the available voice recognition
settings. section of the User Guide. Highlight “Help on Speaking” and push the
1. Highlight “Getting Started” and push the ENTER button.
Note that the Command List feature is only ENTER button.
available when Alternate Command Mode is
active. 2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen using the INFINITI controller.
Tutorials on the operation of the INFINITI Voice
Recognition system
If you choose “Finding a Street Address” or
“Placing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how
to perform these operations using INFINITI
Voice Recognition.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
before the initialization completes, the display
will show the message: “Phonetic data down-
loaded. Please wait.” or a beep sounds.
Before starting
To get the best recognition performance from
INFINITI Voice Recognition, observe the follow-
ing:
● The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent
SAA2166 the system from correctly recognizing the SAA1113
Voice recognition settings voice commands. Giving voice commands
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a 1. Push the TALK switch located on the
The available settings of the INFINITI Voice
command. steering wheel.
Recognition system are described.
1. Highlight “Voice Recognition Settings” ● Speak in a natural conversational voice with-
and push the ENTER button. out pausing between words.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the ● If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
screen using the INFINITI controller. speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initial-
ized, which takes a few seconds. When com-
pleted, the system is ready to accept voice
commands. If the TALK switch is pushed
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
those that are displayed are not accepted. General rule
Please follow the prompts given by the
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For
system.
example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero
● If the command is not recognized, the sys- zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)
tem announces, “Please say again”. Repeat
the command in a clear voice. Examples
● Push the BACK button once to return to the ● 1-800-662-6200
previous screen. – “One eight zero zero six six two six two
● If you want to cancel the command, push zero zero”
and hold the TALK switch. The mes- Improving Recognition of Phone numbers
sage, “Voice cancelled” will be announced.
You can improve the recognition of phone num-
SAA1908
● Push the TALK switch to pause the bers by saying the phone number in three
2. A list of commands appears on the groups of numbers. For example, when you try
operation. Push the TALK switch
screen, and the system announces, again to restart the operation. to call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero”
“Would you like to access Phone, Naviga- first, and the system will then ask you for the
tion, Information or Help?”. ● If you want to adjust the volume of the next three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After
system feedback, push the volume control recognition, the system will then ask for the last
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the buttons [+] or [⫺] on the steering switch or four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this
screen changes from to , use the audio system volume knob while the method of phone digit entry can improve recog-
speak a command. system is making an announcement. nition performance.
4. Continue to follow the voice menu How to speak numbers : When speaking a house number, speak the
prompts and speak after the tone sounds
INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is
until your desired operation is completed.
way to speak numbers when giving voice com- included in the house number, it will not be
Operating tips : mands. Refer to the following examples. recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you
speak “oh” instead of “zero”. You can only say
● Say a command after the tone.
“zero” for “0 (zero)”. You can say either “zero”
● Commands that are available are always or “ oh” for “o (Oh)”.
shown on the display and spoken through
voice menu prompts. Commands other than
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
Command List
Category Command:
Command Action
Phone Operates Phone function
Navigation Operates Navigation function
Information Displays vehicle Information function
Help Displays User Guide

● Phone Command:
Command Action
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Redial Makes a call to the latest dialed number.
Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized. (Available during phone number entry)

● Navigation Command:
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
● Information Command:
Command Action
Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.
Trip Computer Displays trip information.
Maintenance Displays maintenance information.
Traffic Info. Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
Voice command examples
To use the INFINITI Voice Recognition function,
speaking one command is sometimes suffi-
cient, but at other times it is necessary to speak
two or more commands. As examples, some
additional basic operations by voice commands
are described here.
For navigation system commands, see the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA1113 SAA1908
Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone number 2. The system announces, “Would you like
800-662-6200 to access Phone, Navigation, Information
or Help?”
1. Push the TALK switch located on the
steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SAA1909 SAA1910 SAA1911
4. Speak “Dial Number”. 5. Speak “8 0 0”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the
next three digits or dial, or say change
number.”
7. Speak “6 6 2”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Note:
● You can also speak “800-620-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “620-6200” (7 continu-
ous digits), if the area code is not necessary.
However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is recom-
mended for improved recognition. (See
“How to speak numbers” earlier in this
section.)
● You cannot only say a phone number in
using the 3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10
digits using this command. Please use the
“International Call” command for all other
SAA1912 SAA1913 formats.
8. The system announces, “Please say the 10. The system announces, “Dial or Change
● If you say “Change Number” during phone
last four digits” or say change number. Number?”
number entry, the system will automatically
9. Speak “6 2 0 0”. 11. Speak “Dial”. request that you repeat the number using
12. The system makes a call to 800-620- the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the
6200. area code first and then follow the prompts.
● Do not add a “1” in front of the area code
when speaking phone numbers.
● If the system does not recognize your com-
mand, please try repeating the command
using a natural voice. Speaking too slow or
too loudly may further decrease recognition
performance.

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
SAA1113 SAA1908 SAA1909
Example 2 - Placing an international call to the 2. The system announces, “Would you like 4. Speak “International Call”.
phone number 011-81-111-222-3333 to access Phone, Navigation, Information
or Help?”
1. Push the TALK switch located on the
steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION
ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE
The following section is applicable when Alter-
nate Command Mode is activated. (This mode is
selected by default for Canadian customers.)
The Alternate Command Mode enables the op-
eration of the display, audio, and climate con-
trol through Voice Recognition. When this mode
is active, an expanded list of commands can be
spoken after pushing the TALK switch,
and the voice command menu prompts are
SAA1914 SAA1915 turned off.
5. Speak “01181111222333”. 6. Speak “Dial”. Please note that in this mode the recognition
7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222- success rate may be affected as the number of
3333. available commands and ways of speaking each
Note: command are increased. To improve the recog-
nition success rate, try using the Speaker Ad-
Any digit input format is available in the Inter- aptation Function available in that mode. (See
national Number input process. “Speaker adaptation function” later in this sec-
tion.)
In the Alternate Command Mode, review the
expanded command list for this mode, as some
commands available in the Standard Mode are
replaced. Please see the examples on the
screen.

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
SAA1916 SAA2168 SAA1803
Activating Alternate Command Mode 4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
key and push the ENTER button. panel.
When the Standard Mode is active, perform the
following steps to switch to the Alternate Com- 5. The confirmation message is displayed on 2. Highlight the “Others” key using the
mand Mode. the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
the Alternate Command Mode. button.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel. Displaying command list 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key us-
ing the INFINITI controller and push the
2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display If you are controlling the system by voice ENTER button.
and then push the ENTER button. commands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the fol- You can skip steps 1 to 3 above if you say
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and
lowing procedure for displaying the voice com- “Help”.
then push the ENTER button.
mand list (available only in Alternate Command 4. Highlight the “Command List” key using
Mode). the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
SAA1901 SAA2031
5. Highlight a category using the INFINITI 6. Highlight an item using the INFINITI con-
controller and push the ENTER button. troller and push the ENTER button.
7. If necessary, scroll the screen using the
INFINITI controller to view the entire list.
8. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
List of help commands
Navigation Commands:
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Phone Commands:
COMMAND ACTION
Redial Redials the phone number last dialed.
Dial Number Dials the phone number given in the command.
Phonebook Shows the first page of the “Phonebook” list.
Outgoing Calls Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).
Incoming Calls Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).

Audio Commands:
● Music Box
COMMAND ACTION
Music Box Turns on the “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system.

● Radio
COMMAND ACTION
Radio Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
● Satellite
COMMAND ACTION
Satellite Radio Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
● CD
COMMAND ACTION
CD Starts to play a CD.
● Audio
COMMAND ACTION
Audio OFF Turns the audio system off.
● iPod姞
COMMAND ACTION
iPod姞 Turns the iPod姞 system on.
Vehicle Information Commands:
COMMAND ACTION
Traffic Info. Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Fuel Economy Displays the Fuel Economy screen.
Trip Computer Displays the Trip Computer screen.
Maintenance Displays the Maintenance screen.
Tire Pressure Displays the Tire Pressure screen.

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
Climate Commands:
COMMAND ACTION
Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.
Climate Control OFF Turns the climate control system off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
button.

SAA1783 SAA2170
Displaying user guide 5. Highlight an item using the INFINITI con-
You can confirm how to use voice commands by troller and push the ENTER button.
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con- Available items
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several
● Getting Started
voice commands.
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument Describe the basics of how to operate the
panel. INFINITI Voice Recognition system.
2. Highlight the “Others” key using the ● Using the Address Book
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
button.
● Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key us-
ing the INFINITI controller and push the Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
ENTER button. ● Placing Calls
You can skip steps 1 to 3 above if you say Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
“Help”. command operation.
4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
● Help on Speaking Before starting
Displays useful tips for how to correctly To get the best performance from INFINITI Voice
speak commands in order for them to be Recognition, observe the following:
properly recognized by the system.
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
● Voice Recognition Settings possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
Describes the available voice recognition surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
settings. sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
● Speaker Adaptation
rectly.
Tutorial adapting the system to your voice.
● When the climate control is in the AUTO
USING THE SYSTEM mode, the fan speed decreases automati-
cally for easy recognition. SAA1113
Initialization ● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a Giving voice command
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON command.
1. Push and release the TALK switch
position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initial- ● Speak in a natural voice without pausing located on the steering wheel.
ized, which takes a few seconds. When com- between words.
pleted, the system is ready to accept voice
commands. If the TALK switch is pushed
before the initialization completes the display
will show the message: “Phonetic data down-
loaded. Please wait.” or a beep sounds.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
● If the command is not recognized, the sys- Phone numbers
tem announces, “Please say again”. Repeat
Speak phone numbers according to the follow-
the command in a clear voice.
ing examples:
● Push the BACK button once to return to the
● 1-800-662-6200
previous screen.
● If you want to cancel the command, push – “Dial one eight zero zero six six two zero
zero.”
and hold the TALK switch for 1 sec-
ond. The message “Voice canceled” will be Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone
announced. dialing results, say phone numbers as single
digits.
● Push the TALK switch again to pause
the operation. Push the TALK switch Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
SAA1932 to restart the operation. five six thousands”.
2. A list of commands appears on the Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak
● If you want to adjust the volume of the
screen, and the system announces, the number “0” as “ zero”. If the letter “o ( Oh)”
system feedback, push the volume control
“Please say a command”. is included in the house number, it will not be
buttons (+ or ⫺) on the steering wheel or use
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the the audio system volume knob while the recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you
screen changes from to , system is making an announcement. speak “oh” instead of “ zero”. You can only say
speak a command. “zero” for “0 ( Zero)”. You can say either “zero”
How to speak numbers: or “oh” for “o (Oh)”.
Operating tips:
INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain
● Voice commands cannot be accepted when way to speak numbers when giving voice com-
the icon is . mands. Refer to the following examples.
● The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting General rule
the ENTER switch on the steering wheel.
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For
example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero
zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

05/24/08—pattie 墍
SAA1907 SAA1918 SAA2171
Speaker adaptation function 4. Select the user whose voice is memorized 5. Select a category to be learned by the
by the system and push the ENTER but- system from the following list and then
The voice recognition system has a function to ton. push the ENTER button.
learn the user’s voice for better voice recogni-
tion performance. The system can memorize the ● Navigation
voices of up to three persons. ● Phone
Having the system learn the user’s voice ● Audio
1. Push the SETTING button on the instru- ● Information
ment panel, highlight the “Others” key on
● Climate
the display and then push the ENTER
button. The voice commands in the category are
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and displayed.
then push the ENTER button. 6. Select a voice command and then push
3. Highlight the “Speaker Adaptation” key the ENTER button.
and then push the ENTER button. The voice recognition system starts.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

췽—

05/23/08—pattie 墍
Continuous Learning
When this item is turned to ON, you can have
the system learn the voice commands in suc-
cession, without selecting commands one by
one.
Minimize voice feedback
To minimize the voice feedback from the sys-
tem, perform the following steps.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
SAA1921 SAA1922 2. Highlight the “Others” key using the
7. The system requests that you repeat a Speaker Adaptation function settings : INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
command after a tone. button.
Edit Name 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed then push the ENTER button.
screen changes from to ,
on the screen. 4. Highlight the “Minimize Voice Feedback”
speak the command that the system re-
quested. Store Result key and push the ENTER button.
9. When the system has recognized the 5. The item is turned to ON and the vocal
When this item is turned to ON, the voice
voice command, the voice of the user is feedback is reduced if the voice recogni-
recognition system can easily recognize the
learned. tion system is activated.
user’s voice that it has learned.
Push the switch or BACK button to return Reset Result
to the previous screen.
Resets the user’s voice that the voice recogni-
If the system has learned the command cor- tion system has learned.
rectly, the voice command indicator on the
screen turns on.

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

췽—

09/03/08—tbrooks 墍
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for
the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the
system fails to interpret the command corre